Comtech EF Data SDM-9000 Installation and Operation Manual
Werbung
Werbung
SDM-9000
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
Part Number MN/SDM9000.IOM
Revision 4
Errata A
Comtech EFData Documentation Update
Subject:
Date:
Document:
Added 8PSK and 16QAM information
June 6, 2000
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual
Part Number:
Part Number MN/SDM9000.IOM Rev. 4 dated May 5, 1997
MN/SDM9000.EA4
Collating Instructions: Attach this page to page 1-16
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for Section 1.4.3, Table 1-4, Figures
1-6 and 1-7. This information will be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
1.4.3 8PSK and 16QAM (Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon Codec)
The 8PSK and 16QAM specifications for the Eb/N0 required to achieve 10 -6
10 -9 BER with the Viterbi decoder and Reed-Solomon Codec are shown in
to
Table 1-4. Refer to Figures 1-6 (8PSK) and 1-7 (16QAM) for the BER curves with the Reed-Solomon option.
Table 1-4. 8PSK and 16QAM BER Data
Specification
8PSK
Without IDR
8PSK 16QAM 16QAM
BER 2/3 Rate 5/6 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10-6 6.1 dB 8.2 dB 8.3 dB 9.8 dB
8PSK
With IDR
8PSK 16QAM
2/3 Rate 5/6 Rate
6.5 dB 8.6 dB
¾ Rate
8.7 dB
10-7
10-8
10-9
6.4 dB
6.6 dB
6.9 dB
8.5 dB
8.9 dB
9.3 dB
8.5 dB
8.7 dB
8.9 dB
10.0 dB
10.3 dB
10.5 dB
8PSK
Typical
8PSK 16QAM 16QAM
BER 2/3 Rate 5/6 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10-6 5.6 dB 7.7 dB 7.8 dB 9.4 dB
10-7
10-8
10-9
5.8 dB
6.1 dB
6.3 dB
7.9 dB
8.4 dB
8.7 dB
8.1 dB
8.3 dB
8.6 dB
9.7 dB
9.9 dB
10.2 dB
6.9 dB
7.1 dB
7.4 dB
8PSK
6.2 dB
6.5 dB
6.7 dB
8.9 dB
9.3 dB
9.7 dB
8PSK
8.3 dB
8.9 dB
9.1 dB
8.9 dB
9.1 dB
9.4 dB
Typical
16QAM
2/3 Rate 5/6 Rate 3/4 Rate
5.9 dB 8.1 dB 8.2 dB
8.5 dB
8.7 dB
9.0 dB
16QAM
7/8 Rate
10.2 dB
10.4 dB
10.7 dB
10.9 dB
16QAM
7/8 Rate
9.8 dB
10.1 dB
10.3 dB
10.6 dB
Note: Reed-Solomon parameters differ from open network and closed network. Open network meets IESS-308 QPSK operation, using a 4-deep interleaver. Closed networks run different
Reed-Solomon parameters. A longer code word and an 8-deep interleaver is used, resulting in better performance.
10
-6
BER
10 -7
10
-8
10
-9
10 -10
10
-2
10 -3
10
-4
10 -5
8 Mbit/s,
8PSK w/IDR
8 Mbit/s,
8PSK w/IDR
2/3 RATE
SPECIFICATIONS
5/6 RATE
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
E b
/N
0
(dB)
8.0
9.0
Figure 1-6. 8PSK BER Performance Curves (with Reed-Solomon)
10.0
11.0
Filename: T_ERRATA
2
8 Mbit/s, w/ IDR
Figure 1-7. 16QAM BER Performance Curves (with Reed-Solomon)
Filename: T_ERRATA
3
Errata B
Comtech EFData Documentation Update
Subject:
Date:
Document:
Changes to Note in Section 2.4.10, Alarms
January 19, 2001
SDM-9000 Satellite Data Modem Installation and Operation
Manual, Rev. 4, dated May 5, 1997
Part Number: MN/SDM9000.EB4
Collating Instructions: Attach this page to page 2-15
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for page 2-15. This information will be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
2.4.10 Alarms (J10)
The alarms connector is used to provide three Form C contact closures for alarm reporting, as follows:
• Alarm 1 = Not used
• Alarm 2 = TX
• Alarm 3 = RX
The two Form C summary fault contacts currently used are:
• Transmit alarm (Alarm 2)
Refer to Chapter 4 for a discussion of alarms monitored. To obtain a system summary alarm, connect all the Form C contacts in parallel.
The alarms connection is a 9-pin female D connector located on the rear panel of the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security on the mating connector.
Pin # Signal Function Name
1
2 Alarm
NO
COM
3
4
2
6
NC
NO
NC
7 NO
3 COM
9 NC
Note: A connection between the common (COM) and normally closed (NC) contacts indicates no alarm.
Filename: T_ERRATA
1
Errata C
Subject:
Date:
Document:
Changes to Table 3-2 (Modulator PCB Jumper Settings)
January 23, 2002
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual,
Part Number:
Rev. 4, dated May 5, 1997
MN/SDM9000.EC4
Collating Instructions: Attach this page to page 3-3
Comments:
Comtech EFData Documentation Update
The following changes provide updated information for Table 3-2. This information will be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
3.2 Modulator
The modulator PCB (AS/3969) is located in the top slot of the modem chassis. The jumper settings are listed in Table 3-2. Figure 3-2 shows the modulator card and the jumper locations.
Table 3-2. Modulator PCB Jumper Settings
Jumper
J7
J9
(EEPROM size select)
Position
1 to 2
2 to 3
1 to 2
2 to 3
Function
Output forced ON, test mode
Normal, processor control
27C512 (64K EEPROM)
27C256 (32K EEPROM)
Note: The modulator PCB jumpers in Table 3-2 are factory set.
Filename: T_ERRATA
1
SDM-9000
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
Comtech EFData is an ISO 9001
Registered Company.
Part Number MN/SDM9000.IOM
Revision 4
May 5, 1997
Copyright © Comtech EFData, 2000. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Comtech EFData, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, (480) 333-2200, FAX: (480) 333-2161.
ii
Customer Support
Contact the Comtech EFData Customer Support Department for:
•
Product support or training
•
Information on upgrading or returning a product
•
Reporting comments or suggestions concerning manuals
A Customer Support representative may be reached at:
Comtech EFData
Attention: Customer Support Department
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA
(480) 333-2200 (Main Comtech EFData Number)
(480) 333-4357 (Customer Support Desk)
(480) 333-2161 FAX or, E-Mail can be sent to the Customer Support Department at: [email protected]
Contact us via the web at www.comtechefdata.com
.
1.
To return a Comtech EFData product (in-warranty and out-of-warranty) for repair or replacement:
2.
Request a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from the Comtech
EFData Customer Support Department.
3.
Be prepared to supply the Customer Support representative with the model number, serial number, and a description of the problem.
4.
To ensure that the product is not damaged during shipping, pack the product in its original shipping carton/packaging.
5.
Ship the product back to Comtech EFData. (Shipping charges should be prepaid.)
For more information regarding the warranty policies, see Warranty Policy, p. xiv.
Rev. 4
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION........................................................................................ 1–1
1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................. 1–2
1.1.1 Nyquist Filter Printed Circuit Boards ............................................................................................................... 1–3
1.1.2 Description........................................................................................................................................................ 1–4
1.1.3 Options ............................................................................................................................................................. 1–6
1.1.3.1 Reed-Solomon Codec................................................................................................................................ 1–6
1.1.3.2 8PSK/16QAM ........................................................................................................................................... 1–6
1.1.3.3 Direct Broadcast Satellite .......................................................................................................................... 1–7
1.2 Modem Assemblies................................................................................................................................................. 1–8
1.3 Modem Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 1–10
1.4 BER Performance Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 1–12
1.4.1 Viterbi Decoder BER (QPSK).......................................................................................................................... 1–12
1.4.2 Reed-Solomon Codec BER (QPSK)................................................................................................................. 1–14
1.4.3 8PSK and 16QAM (Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon Codec) .................................................................... 1–16
CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 2–1
2.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................................... 2–1
2.2 System Options....................................................................................................................................................... 2–2
2.3 System Installation................................................................................................................................................. 2–3
2.4 External Connectors .............................................................................................................................................. 2–5
2.4.1 TX/IF Output (CP1).......................................................................................................................................... 2–6
2.4.2 RX/IF Input (CP2) ............................................................................................................................................ 2–6
2.4.3 Receive Data (CP3) .......................................................................................................................................... 2–6
2.4.4 Send Data (CP4) ............................................................................................................................................... 2–6
2.4.5 External Clock (CP5)........................................................................................................................................ 2–6
2.4.6 Remote (J6) ...................................................................................................................................................... 2–7
2.4.7 Fault (J7)........................................................................................................................................................... 2–8
2.4.8 DATA I/O (ESC) Interface (J8)........................................................................................................................ 2–9
2.4.8.1 G.703 (IDR) Interface (J8) (Audio Mode) ................................................................................................ 2–10
Rev. 4 iii
Preface SDM-9000 Satelite Modem
2.4.8.2 G.703 (IDR) Interface (J8) (64 kbit/s Mode) ............................................................................................ 2–11
2.4.8.3 ECL Interface (J8) ..................................................................................................................................... 2–12
2.4.8.4 MIL-STD-188 Interface (J8) ..................................................................................................................... 2–13
2.4.9 AUX 1 (J9) ....................................................................................................................................................... 2–14
2.4.10 Alarms (J10) ................................................................................................................................................... 2–15
2.4.11 AC Power ....................................................................................................................................................... 2–16
2.4.12 DC Power ....................................................................................................................................................... 2–16
2.4.13 Ground (GND)................................................................................................................................................ 2–16
CHAPTER 3. CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 3–1
3.1 Display/M&C.......................................................................................................................................................... 3–1
3.2 Modulator ............................................................................................................................................................... 3–3
3.3 Demodulator ........................................................................................................................................................... 3–4
3.4 Interface .................................................................................................................................................................. 3–5
3.5 Nyquist Filter Configuration................................................................................................................................. 3–9
3.5.1 Compatibility .................................................................................................................................................... 3–10
3.5.2 Installation ........................................................................................................................................................ 3–10
3.5.2.1 Unpacking Instructions.............................................................................................................................. 3–10
3.5.2.2 Tools Required .......................................................................................................................................... 3–11
3.5.2.3 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................ 3–11
3.5.2.3.1 Nyquist Filter Removal ...................................................................................................................... 3–11
3.5.2.3.2 Nyquist Filter Replacement................................................................................................................ 3–13
3.6 Software Configuration ......................................................................................................................................... 3–14
3.6.1 Revision Emulation .......................................................................................................................................... 3–14
3.6.2 Remote Interface Specification......................................................................................................................... 3–15
3.6.2.1 Remote Baud Rate..................................................................................................................................... 3–15
3.6.2.2 Remote Address ........................................................................................................................................ 3–15
3.6.3 Modem Defaults ............................................................................................................................................... 3–16
CHAPTER 4. OPERATION .............................................................................................. 4–1
4.1 Front Panel ............................................................................................................................................................. 4–1
4.1.1 LED Indicators ................................................................................................................................................. 4–2
4.1.2 Front Panel Controls ......................................................................................................................................... 4–3
4.2 Menu System .......................................................................................................................................................... 4–4
4.2.1 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................... 4–5
4.2.1.1 Configuration Modulator........................................................................................................................... 4–7
4.2.1.2 Configuration Demodulator....................................................................................................................... 4–11
4.2.1.3 Configuration Interface ............................................................................................................................. 4–15
4.2.1.4 Configuration Save.................................................................................................................................... 4–20
4.2.1.5 Configuration Recall ................................................................................................................................. 4–21
4.2.2 Monitor ............................................................................................................................................................. 4–23
4.2.3 Faults/Alarms.................................................................................................................................................... 4–25
4.2.3.1 Modulator Faults ....................................................................................................................................... 4–26
4.2.3.2 Demodulator Faults ................................................................................................................................... 4–27
4.2.3.3 TX Interface Faults.................................................................................................................................... 4–28 iv Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satelite Modem Preface
4.2.3.4 RX Interface Faults ................................................................................................................................... 4–29
4.2.3.5 Common Equipment Faults ....................................................................................................................... 4–30
4.2.3.6 Backward Alarms ...................................................................................................................................... 4–30
4.2.4 Stored Faults/Alarms ........................................................................................................................................ 4–33
4.2.5 Utility................................................................................................................................................................ 4–35
4.2.5.1 Utility Modulator....................................................................................................................................... 4–37
4.2.5.2 Utility Demodulator .................................................................................................................................. 4–39
4.2.5.3 Utility Interface ......................................................................................................................................... 4–42
4.2.5.4 Utility System............................................................................................................................................ 4–45
4.2.5.5 Utility Modem Type .................................................................................................................................. 4–49
4.2.5.6 Utility Factory Setup ................................................................................................................................. 4–50
4.3 Clocking Options.................................................................................................................................................... 4–53
4.3.1 G.703 Interface Clocking.................................................................................................................................. 4–53
4.3.1.1 TX Timing................................................................................................................................................. 4–53
4.3.1.2 RX Timing................................................................................................................................................. 4–53
4.3.1.2.1 RX Timing (with Buffer) ................................................................................................................... 4–53
4.3.1.2.2 RX Timing (without Buffer) .............................................................................................................. 4–53
4.3.2 ECL/MIL-STD-188 Interface Clocking ........................................................................................................... 4–54
4.3.2.1 TX Timing................................................................................................................................................ 4–54
4.3.2.2 RX Timing................................................................................................................................................. 4–54
4.3.2.2.1 RX Timing (with Buffer) ................................................................................................................... 4–54
4.3.2.2.2 RX Timing (without Buffer) .............................................................................................................. 4–54
CHAPTER 5. THEORY OF OPERATION ........................................................................ 5–1
5.1 Display/M&C.......................................................................................................................................................... 5–1
5.1.1 Description........................................................................................................................................................ 5–1
5.1.2 Theory of Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 5–2
5.2 Modulator ............................................................................................................................................................... 5–4
5.2.1 Description........................................................................................................................................................ 5–4
5.2.2 Specifications.................................................................................................................................................... 5–6
5.2.3 Theory of Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 5–7
5.2.4 Theory of Modulation Types ............................................................................................................................ 5–9
5.2.4.1 Description ................................................................................................................................................ 5–9
5.2.4.2 QPSK Encoding/Modulation..................................................................................................................... 5–9
5.2.4.3 8PSK Encoding/Modulation...................................................................................................................... 5–10
5.2.4.4 16QAM Encoding/Modulation.................................................................................................................. 5–10
5.3 Demodulator ........................................................................................................................................................... 5–11
5.3.1 Description........................................................................................................................................................ 5–11
5.3.2 Specifications.................................................................................................................................................... 5–11
5.3.3 Theory of Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 5–13
5.4 Viterbi Decoder ...................................................................................................................................................... 5–16
5.4.1 Description........................................................................................................................................................ 5–16
5.4.2 Specifications.................................................................................................................................................... 5–16
5.4.3 Theory of Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 5–17
5.5 Interface .................................................................................................................................................................. 5–18
5.5.1 Description........................................................................................................................................................ 5–18
5.5.2 Digital Interface Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 5–19
5.5.2.1 G.703 ......................................................................................................................................................... 5–20
Rev. 4 v
Preface SDM-9000 Satelite Modem
5.5.2.2 ECL ........................................................................................................................................................... 5–20
5.5.2.3 MIL-STD-188 ........................................................................................................................................... 5–20
5.5.3 Theory of Operation ......................................................................................................................................... 5–21
5.5.3.1 Transmit Data Path .................................................................................................................................... 5–23
5.5.3.2 Receive Data Path ..................................................................................................................................... 5–24
5.5.3.3 Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................. 5–26
5.5.3.3.1 Baseband Loopback ........................................................................................................................... 5–26
5.5.3.3.2 Interface Loopback ............................................................................................................................ 5–27
5.5.3.4 Engineering Service Channel (ESC) ......................................................................................................... 5–27
5.6 Backward Alarm Theory and Connections ......................................................................................................... 5–28
CHAPTER 6. MAINTENANCE......................................................................................... 6–1
6.1 System Checkout .................................................................................................................................................... 6–1
6.1.1 Interface ............................................................................................................................................................ 6–1
6.1.2 Modulator ......................................................................................................................................................... 6–3
6.1.3 Demodulator ..................................................................................................................................................... 6–8
6.1.4 Test Points ........................................................................................................................................................ 6–10
6.1.4.1 Interface PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 6–10
6.1.4.2 Modulator PCB ......................................................................................................................................... 6–11
6.1.4.3 Demodulator PCB ..................................................................................................................................... 6–12
6.2 Fault Isolation......................................................................................................................................................... 6–13
6.2.1 Guidelines ......................................................................................................................................................... 6–13
6.2.2 System Faults/Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 6–14
6.2.2.1 Fault/Alarm Display and Description........................................................................................................ 6–18
6.2.2.2 Fault/Alarm Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 6–19
6.2.2.2.1 Modulator Faults ................................................................................................................................ 6–19
6.2.2.2.2 Demodulator Faults............................................................................................................................ 6–20
6.2.2.2.3 TX Interface Faults ............................................................................................................................ 6–22
6.2.2.2.4 RX Interface Faults ............................................................................................................................ 6–23
6.2.2.2.5 Common Equipment Faults................................................................................................................ 6–25
6.2.2.2.6 Backward Alarms............................................................................................................................... 6–26
6.3 Module Replacement ............................................................................................................................................. 6–27
6.4 Module Identification ............................................................................................................................................ 6–27
6.5 Repacking for Shipment ........................................................................................................................................ 6–27
APPENDIX A. OPTIONS .................................................................................................. A–1
A.1 Reed-Solomon Codec ............................................................................................................................................ A–1
A.1.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................................... A–2
A.1.2 Theory of Operation......................................................................................................................................... A–2
A.1.2.1 Reed-Solomon Encoder............................................................................................................................ A–2
A.1.2.2 Reed-Solomon Decoder............................................................................................................................ A–5
A.1.3 Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... A–7
A.1.3.1 Unpacking Instructions............................................................................................................................. A–7
A.1.3.2 Tools Required ......................................................................................................................................... A–7
A.1.3.3 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................... A–8
A.2 Direct Broadcast Satellite ..................................................................................................................................... A–10 vi Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satelite Modem Preface
A.2.1 Requirements ................................................................................................................................................... A–11
A.2.2 Baseband Physical Interfaces........................................................................................................................... A–12
A.2.2.1 ECL Physical Interface............................................................................................................................. A–12
A.2.2.2 PECL Physical Interface........................................................................................................................... A–13
A.2.3 DBS Baseband Interface .................................................................................................................................. A–14
A.2.3.1 DBS TX Baseband Interface .................................................................................................................... A–14
A.2.3.2 DBS RX Baseband Interface .................................................................................................................... A–14
A.2.4 Baseband Interface Requirements.................................................................................................................... A–15
A.2.4.1 Timing for Transmit Baseband Interface.................................................................................................. A–15
A.2.4.1.1 DBS Mode TX SYNC Pulse Timing ................................................................................................ A–16
A.2.4.2 Timing for Receive Baseband Interface ................................................................................................... A–16
A.2.4.2.1 DBS Mode Receive SYNC Pulse Timing ......................................................................................... A–17
A.2.5 SYNC Decoder (Correlater) ............................................................................................................................ A–18
A.2.5.1 DBS Mode SYNC Decoder for 204-Byte Packets ................................................................................... A–18
A.2.5.1.1 TX Functions of the DBS Mode SYNC Decoder ............................................................................. A–18
A.2.5.1.2 RX Functions of the DBS Mode SYNC Decoder ............................................................................. A–18
A.2.6 SYNC 1 Inversion and Scrambler/Descrambler .............................................................................................. A–19
A.2.6.1 DBS Mode (De)Scrambler for 204-Byte Packets..................................................................................... A–20
A.2.7 Reed-Solomon Coder/Decoder ........................................................................................................................ A–21
A.2.7.1 DBS Mode Check Byte Framing for 204-Byte Packets ........................................................................... A–22
A.2.8 Depth 12 Interleaver/De-interleaver ................................................................................................................ A–23
A.2.9 Inner Coder/Decoder........................................................................................................................................ A–25
A.2.9.1 Punctured Operation ................................................................................................................................. A–25
A.2.9.2 Signal Space Mapping .............................................................................................................................. A–27
A.2.10 Nyquist Filters................................................................................................................................................ A–28
A.2.11 DVB with Reed-Solomon BER (QPSK) ....................................................................................................... A–29
A.3 ESC 64 kbit/s Data Option ................................................................................................................................... A–31
APPENDIX B. REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION .......................................................... B–1
B.1 General ................................................................................................................................................................... B–1
B.2 Message Structure ................................................................................................................................................. B–2
B.2.1 Start Character ................................................................................................................................................. B–2
B.2.2 Device Address ................................................................................................................................................ B–2
B.2.3 Command/Responses ....................................................................................................................................... B–3
B.2.4 End Character................................................................................................................................................... B–3
B.3 Configuration Commands/Responses.................................................................................................................. B–4
B.3.1 Modulator......................................................................................................................................................... B–4
B.3.2 Demodulator .................................................................................................................................................... B–5
B.3.3 Interface ........................................................................................................................................................... B–6
B.3.4 System.............................................................................................................................................................. B–9
B.4 Status Commands/Responses ............................................................................................................................... B–10
B.4.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................................... B–10
B.4.2 Error Performance............................................................................................................................................ B–15
B.5 Stored Faults .......................................................................................................................................................... B–19
GLOSSARY ...................................................................................................................... g-1
Rev. 4 vii
Preface SDM-9000 Satelite Modem viii
Figures
Figure 1-1. SDM-9000 .............................................................................................................................................. 1–1
Figure 1-2. Modular Construction ............................................................................................................................. 1–4
Figure 1-3. SDM-9000 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 1–5
Figure 1-4. Viterbi BER Performance Curves (QPSK) ............................................................................................. 1–13
Figure 1-5. Reed-Solomon BER Performance Curves (QPSK)................................................................................. 1–15
Figure 1-6. 8PSK BER Performance Curves (with Reed-Solomon) ......................................................................... 1–17
Figure 1-7. 16QAM BER Performance Curves (with Reed-Solomon) ..................................................................... 1–18
Figure 1-8. SDM-9000 Typical Spectral Occupancy................................................................................................. 1–19
Figure 2-1. SDM-9000 Dimensional Drawing .......................................................................................................... 2–4
Figure 2-2. SDM-9000 Rear Panel View................................................................................................................... 2–5
Figure 3-1. Display/M&C PCB ................................................................................................................................. 3–2
Figure 3-2. Modulator PCB (AS/3969) ..................................................................................................................... 3–3
Figure 3-3. Demodulator PCB (AS/3970) ................................................................................................................. 3–4
Figure 3-4. Interface PCB (AS/3971) ........................................................................................................................ 3–6
Figure 3-5. Interface PCB (AS/4477) ........................................................................................................................ 3–7
Figure 3-6. Interface PCB (AS/5618) ........................................................................................................................ 3–8
Figure 3-7. Nyquist Filter Installation ....................................................................................................................... 3–12
Figure 4-1. SDM-9000 Front Panel View.................................................................................................................. 4–1
Figure 4-2. Main Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 4–4
Figure 4-3. Configuration Modulator Menu .............................................................................................................. 4–6
Figure 4-4. Configuration Demodulator Menu .......................................................................................................... 4–10
Figure 4-5. Configuration Interface Menu................................................................................................................. 4–14
Figure 4-6. Configuration Save Menu ....................................................................................................................... 4–20
Figure 4-7. Configuration Recall Menu..................................................................................................................... 4–21
Figure 4-8. Monitor Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 4–22
Figure 4-9. Faults/Alarm Menu ................................................................................................................................. 4–24
Figure 4-10. Stored Faults/Alarms Menu .................................................................................................................. 4–32
Figure 4-11. Utility Modulator Menu ........................................................................................................................ 4–36
Figure 4-12. Utility Demodulator Menu.................................................................................................................... 4–38
Figure 4-13. Utility Interface Menu........................................................................................................................... 4–40
Figure 4-13. Utility Interface Menu Continued ......................................................................................................... 4–41
Figure 4-14. Utility System Menu ............................................................................................................................. 4–44
Figure 4-15. Utility Modem Type Menu ................................................................................................................... 4–48
Figure 4-16. Utility Factory Setup Menu................................................................................................................... 4–50
Figure 4-17. RF Loopback......................................................................................................................................... 4–51
Figure 4-18. IF Loopback .......................................................................................................................................... 4–51
Figure 4-19. Baseband Loopback .............................................................................................................................. 4–52
Figure 4-20. Interface Loopback ............................................................................................................................... 4–52
Figure 4-21. G.703 Interface Clocking Diagram ....................................................................................................... 4–55
Figure 4-22. ECL/MIL-STD-188 Interface Clocking Diagram ................................................................................. 4–55
Figure 5-1. Display/M&C Block Diagram ................................................................................................................ 5–2
Figure 5-2. Modulator Baseband Section Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 5–4
Figure 5-3. Modulator RF Section Block Diagram.................................................................................................... 5–5
Figure 5-4. Demodulator Block Diagram .................................................................................................................. 5–12
Figure 5-5. Viterbi Decoder Block Diagram ............................................................................................................. 5–16
Figure 5-6. Interface Block Diagram......................................................................................................................... 5–22
Figure 5-7. Baseband Loopback Block Diagram....................................................................................................... 5–26
Figure 5-8. Interface Loopback Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 5–27
Figure 6-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup ....................................................................................................................... 6–2
Figure 6-2. Typical Output Spectrum (with Noise) ................................................................................................... 6–4
Figure 6-3. Typical Output Spectrum (without Noise) .............................................................................................. 6–4
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satelite Modem Preface
Figure 6-4. Typical Eye Constellations ..................................................................................................................... 6–9
Figure 6-5. Interface PCB Test Points ....................................................................................................................... 6–10
Figure 6-6. Modulator PCB Test Points .................................................................................................................... 6–11
Figure 6-7. Demodulator PCB Test Points ................................................................................................................ 6–12
Figure A-1. Reed-Solomon Codec Block Diagram ................................................................................................... A–1
Figure A-2. Reed-Solomon Encoder Section Block Diagram ................................................................................... A–2
Figure A-3. Reed-Solomon Codec Frame Format ..................................................................................................... A–4
Figure A-4. Reed-Solomon Decoder Section Block Diagram ................................................................................... A–5
Figure A-5. Reed-Solomon Installation..................................................................................................................... A–9
Figure A-6. Block Diagram of SDM-9000 Configured for DBS/DVB Operation .................................................... A–11
Figure A-7. Typical Differential ECL Receiver and Driver ...................................................................................... A–12
Figure A-8. Typical Differential PECL Receiver and Driver .................................................................................... A–13
Figure A-9. DBS Mode Baseband Packet ................................................................................................................. A–14
Figure A-10. Timing for Transmit Baseband Interface ............................................................................................. A–15
Figure A-11. DBS Mode TX SYNC Pulse Timing ................................................................................................... A–16
Figure A-12. Timing for Receive Baseband Interface ............................................................................................... A–16
Figure A-13. DBS Mode Receive SYNC Pulse Timing ............................................................................................ A–17
Figure A-14. DBS Mode Receive with Extended SYNC .......................................................................................... A–17
Figure A-15. Scrambler/Descrambler........................................................................................................................ A–19
Figure A-16. DBS Scrambler Sequence .................................................................................................................... A–20
Figure A-17. Reed-Solomon RS(204,188,8) Error-Protected Packet ........................................................................ A–21
Figure A-18. Interleaver/De-interleaver .................................................................................................................... A–23
Figure A-19. Interleaved Frame Structure ................................................................................................................. A–24
Figure A-20. DVB Puncturing................................................................................................................................... A–25
Figure A-21. QPSK Constellation ............................................................................................................................. A–27
Figure A-22. QPSK (1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Rates) with Reed-Solomon (DVB)...................................................................... A–30
Tables
Table 1-1. SDM-9000 Specifications............................................................................................................................. 1–10
Table 1-2. Viterbi Decoder BER Data ........................................................................................................................... 1–12
Table 1-3. Reed-Solomon BER Data ............................................................................................................................. 1–14
Table 1-4. 8PSK and 16QAM BER Data....................................................................................................................... 1–16
Table 2-1. Modem Rear Panel Connectors .................................................................................................................... 2–5
Table 3-1. Display/M&C PCB Jumper Settings ............................................................................................................ 3–2
Table 3-2. Modulator PCB Jumper Settings .................................................................................................................. 3–3
Table 3-3. Demodulator PCB Jumper Settings .............................................................................................................. 3–4
Table 3-4. Interface Configuration Jumper Settings ...................................................................................................... 3–5
Table 3-5. SDM-9000 Revision Emulation.................................................................................................................... 3–14
Table 3-6. Modem Defaults ........................................................................................................................................... 3–16
Table 6-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0 Chart (QPSK)............................................................................................... 6–5
Table 6-2. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0 Chart (8PSK)................................................................................................ 6–6
Table 6-3. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0 Chart (16QAM)............................................................................................ 6–7
Table 6-4. SDM-9000 Modem Fault Tree ..................................................................................................................... 6–15
Table A-1. Electrical Characteristics of ECL and PECL Interface Types ..................................................................... A–13
Table A-2. TX Baseband Interface Timing.................................................................................................................... A–15
Table A-3. Receive Baseband Interface Timing ............................................................................................................ A–17
Table A-4. Rate Exchange Ratios for DVB Puncturing................................................................................................. A–26
Table A-5. Reed-Solomon BER Data ............................................................................................................................ A–29
Rev. 4 ix
Preface SDM-9000 Satelite Modem
Overview of Changes to Previous Edition
Changes made to Rev. 3 include:
•
Added metric conversion paragraph to Preface.
•
Incorporated comment column to table on Page 1-3.
•
Revised table reflecting SDM-9000 part numbers.
•
Relocated reference to Figure 1-8 to Page 1-21.
•
Rearranged Chapter 2 paragraphing as follows:
•
Changed 2.5 to 2.2
•
Changed 2.2 to 2.3
•
Changed 2.4 to 2.5
•
Added second step to Note on Page 2-3.
•
Rearranged Table 2-1 to reflect a alpha/numeric sequence.
•
Rearranged paragraphing to agree with Table 2-1.
•
Deleted the notes following 2.4.8.1, 2.4.8.1.1, 2.4.8.2, and 2.4.8.3.
•
Chapter 2.4.8 note references are to the notes listed in 2.4.8.
•
Incorporated tool reference in 3.5.2.3.1, step (1)
•
Incorporated tool reference in 3.5.2.3.2, step (1).
•
Revised section 3.6.1 to reflect history of software versions.
•
Revised table in 4.2.1.1 to agree with Figure 4-3.
•
Revised Figure 4-4 to reflect to reflect Test Mode Configuration conditions.
•
Revised table 4.2.1.2 to agree with Figure 4-4.
•
Revised table 4.2.1.3 to agree with Figure 4-5.
•
Deleted 4.2.4.1.
•
Added Reed Solomon to table specified in 5.5.1.
•
Added section A.3 ESC 64 kbit/s Data Option to Appendix A.
•
Added metric conversion table to inside of back cover.
x Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satelite Modem Preface
About this Manual
This manual provides installation and operation information for the EFData SDM-9000 satellite modem. This is a technical document intended for earth station engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the operation and maintenance of the
SDM-9000.
Related Documents
The following documents are referenced in this manual:
•
Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, “Electrical Characteristics of
Digital Interface Circuits”
•
Comtech EFData Specification SP/3965
•
INTELSAT Earth Station Standards (IESS) 308/309
•
Sonnet Specifications STS-1
•
International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee (CCITT) V.35
•
European Broadcasting Union (EBU) DVB SB 5 (94) 5
•
EBU ETS 300 421
•
ISO/IEC 13818
•
Comtech EFData B141-1 Breakout Panel Installation and Operation Manual
Conventions and References
Cautions and Warnings
C AU TIO N
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION may also be used to indicate other unsafe practices or risks of property damage.
WAR N IN G
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Rev. 4 xi
Preface SDM-9000 Satelite Modem
Metric Conversion
Metric conversion information is located on the inside back cover of this manual. This information is provided to assist the operator in cross-referencing English to Metric conversions.
Recommended Standard Designations
Recommended Standard (RS) Designations have been superseded by the new designation of the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). References to the old designations are shown only when depicting actual text displayed on the screen of the unit (RS-232, RS-
485, etc.). All other references in the manual will be shown with the EIA designations
(EIA-232, EIA-485, etc.) only.
Military Standards
References to “MIL-STD-188” apply to the 114A series (i.e., MIL-STD-188-114A), which provides electrical and functional characteristics of the unbalanced and balanced voltage digital interface circuits applicable to both long haul and tactical communications. Specifically, these references apply to the MIL-STD-188-114A electrical characteristics for a balanced voltage digital interface circuit, Type 1 generator, for the full range of data rates. For more information, refer to the Department of Defense
(DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, “Electrical Characteristics of Digital Interface Circuits.”
Trademarks
Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
xii Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satelite Modem Preface
European EMC Directive
In order to meet the European Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive
(EN55022, EN50082-1), properly shielded cables for DATA I/O are required. More specifically, these cables must be double-shielded from end-to-end, ensuring a continuous ground shield.
The following information is applicable for the European Low Voltage Directive
(EN60950):
<HAR> Type of power cord required for use in the European Community.
!
CAUTION: Double-pole/Neutral Fusing
ACHTUNG: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung
International Symbols:
Alternating Current.
Fuse.
Safety Ground.
Chassis Ground.
Note: For additional symbols, refer to “Cautions and Warnings” listed earlier in this preface.
Reporting Comments or Suggestions Concerning this Manual
Comments and suggestions regarding the content and design of this manual will be appreciated. To submit comments, please contact the Comtech EFData Customer Support
Department.
Rev. 4 xiii
Preface SDM-9000 Satelite Modem
Warranty Policy
This Comtech EFData product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, Comtech
EFData will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective.
For equipment under warranty, the customer is responsible for freight to Comtech
EFData and all related custom, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EFData is responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the customer. Comtech EFData will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air,
Express, Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EFData.
Limitations of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper installation or maintenance, abuse, unauthorized modification, or operation outside of environmental specifications for the product, or, for damages that occur due to improper repackaging of equipment for return to Comtech EFData.
No other warranty is expressed or implied. Comtech EFData specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular purpose.
Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are the buyer's sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech
EFData shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
Disclaimer
Comtech EFData has reviewed this manual thoroughly in order that it will be an easy-touse guide to your equipment. All statements, technical information, and recommendations in this manual and in any guides or related documents are believed reliable, but the accuracy and completeness thereof are not guaranteed or warranted, and they are not intended to be, nor should they be understood to be, representations or warranties concerning the products described. Further, Comtech EFData reserves the right to make changes in the specifications of the products described in this manual at any time without notice and without obligation to notify any person of such changes.
If you have any questions regarding your equipment or the information in this manual, please contact the Comtech EFData Customer Support Department.
xiv Rev. 4
Rev.4
1
Chapter 1.
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the options and provides an overview, description, and specifications for the SDM-9000 satellite modem, referred to in this manual as
“the modem” (Figure 1-1).
Figure 1-1. SDM-9000
1–1
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
1.1 Overview
The modem is a high performance, full-duplex, digital-vector modulator/demodulator that meets the open network requirements of the IESS-308 specifications for
Intermediate Data Rate (IDR). The modem can also be used for any closed network and satellite communication system applications. Refer to Section 1.1.3 for additional applications data.
Module types that are compatible with each application are as follows:
Configuration Interface Type
70/140 MHz Duplex (AC) MIL188/144 with Buffer
70/140 MHz TX (AC) MIL188/144 with ESC
70/140 MHz RX (AC) MIL188/144 with Buffer /RS
70/140 MHz Duplex (DC) MIL188/144 with ESC/RS
70/140 MHz TX (DC)
70/140 MHz RX (DC)
ECL with Buffer
ECL with ESC
ECL with Buffer/RS
PECL with Buffer
PECL with ESC
PECL with Buffer/RS
PECL with ESC/RS
G.703 with Buffer
G.703 with ESC
G.703 Buffer/RS
G.703 with ESC/RS
G.703 with ESC/64 kbit/s
G.703 with ESC/64 kbit/s /RS
FEC Option
QPSK
8PSSK/16QAM
Options
50
Ω
H/S 10-7
Digital Video Broadcast
(DVB)
H/S 10-7 with DVB
Notes:
1. 75
Ω
, QPSK, and +5 dBm output are standard with the SDM-9000.
2. The standard Reed-Solomon is in accordance with IESS-308 (IDR).
The modem operates with IF converter equipment operating within a 50 to 180 MHz band. An internal channel unit, conforming to the IESS-308 specification, provides overhead designated for Engineering Service Circuits (ESC).
The modem contains:
•
Built-in scramblers/descramblers
•
Differential encoder/decoder
•
Transmit and receive frequency synthesizers
•
Multi–rate Forward Error Correction (FEC) convolutional encoder and Viterbi decoder
1–2 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Introduction
The modem provides high performance with:
•
Narrow occupied bandwidth
•
Automatic signal acquisition
•
High flexibility
•
Extensive online monitoring circuits
The modem interfaces between Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) fixed-rate terminal equipment that operates within the following specifications:
•
Data rate of 6.0 to 51.84 Mbit/s
•
Symbol rate of 1.7 to 37.5 Ms/s
•
Configured to add overhead and framing to the data
The 51.84 Mbit/s data rate is defined by STS-1 (Sonnet specifications).
1.1.1 Nyquist Filter Printed Circuit Boards
The modem features include a Nyquist filter Printed Circuit Board (PCB) for enabling the user to change data rates at the modulator or demodulator. The modem supports up to four channels at the following data rate and modulation type combinations:
Data Rates
Modulation Types
6.0 to 51.84 Mbit/s Comments
QPSK 1/2 Rate
QPSK 3/4 Rate
QPSK 7/8 Rate
8PSK 2/3 Rate
8PSK 5/6 Rate
16QAM 3/4 Rate
16QAM 7/8 Rate
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Data rate information is automatically recovered from the filter module upon system power-up or initialization. The installed interface, modulator, and demodulator must be compatible with the installed filters for proper modem operation. The filters can be installed in the factory or field.
Refer to Chapter 3 for information about modem configuration.
Rev. 4 1–3
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
1.1.2 Description
The modem is a complete, self-contained unit in a standard 2 unit (2U) 19” rack-mountable enclosure weighing approximately 19 lbs. The unit is of modular construction consisting of five PCB assemblies:
•
Modulator
•
Demodulator
•
Interface
•
Display/Monitor & Control (M&C) (front panel)
•
Backplane (rear panel)
The backplane PCB is mounted on the chassis assembly and contains receptacles for three plug-in PCBs:
•
Modulator
•
Demodulator
•
Interface
Test points are located on the front edges of the three PCBs. Figure 1-2 shows the front view of the modem (without the front panel).
All M&C functions and indicators for operation of the modem are located on the display/M&C. The chassis also contains a fan (on the rear panel) and a power supply.
Refer to Figure 1-3 for a system block diagram.
1–4
Figure 1-2. Modular Construction
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Introduction
Rev. 4
Figure 1-3. SDM-9000 Block Diagram
1–5
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
1.1.3 Options
1.1.3.1 Reed-Solomon Codec
The Reed-Solomon Codec works in conjunction with the Viterbi decoder, and includes additional framing, interleaving, and Codec.
This option can be factory or user installed. Refer to the following table for modem compatibility requirements.
Interface PCB
Display/M&C PCB
Modulator PCB
Demodulator PCB
Reed-Solomon Codec PCB
Reed-Solomon Daughter
Board (DVB Standard)
Type 2 or 3 (or greater)
AS/3971-2
AS/3971-3
AS/2305 Rev. C4 (or greater)
AS/3969
AS/3970
AS/4080
AS/4524
Refer to Appendix A for more information.
1.1.3.2 8PSK/16QAM
The 8PSK modulation type is a PSK encoding method for providing a modulated carrier at 6.0 to 51.84 Mbit/s by pragmatic trellis encoding at 2/3 and 5/6 code rates. This option is installed at the factory.
The 16QAM is an encoding method for providing a modulated carrier at 6.0 to
51.84 Mbit/s in 3/4 and 7/8 rates.
Interface PCB
Display/M&C PCB
Modulator PCB
Demodulator PCB
Reed-Solomon Codec PCB
Type 2 and 3 (or greater)
AS/3971-2
AS/3971-3
AS/2305 Rev. C4 (or greater)
AS/3969-1, -2, -5, and -6
AS/3970-1 and -2
AS/4080
Note: The Reed-Solomon option is required for 8PSK/16QAM operation.
1–6 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Introduction
1.1.3.3 Direct Broadcast Satellite
As implemented in the SDM-9000, Direct Broadcast Satellite (DBS) mode supports data rates up to 44.736 Mbit/s using a single FEC channel. Single channel implementation differs significantly from the International Telecommunications Satellite Organisation
(INTELSAT) specifications (for carriers greater than 10 Mbit/s) for communicating the data across three channels.
Refer to Appendix A for more information.
Rev. 4 1–7
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
1.2 Modem Assemblies
The following table reflects the possible configurations available for the SDM-9000:
Configuration
70/140 MHz
70/140 MHz
70/140 MHz
70/140 MHz
70/140 MHz
70/140 MHz
Type
Duplex
TX
RX
AC
AC
AC
Duplex
TX
RX
DC
DC
DC
Chassis P/N
3966-1
3966-1
3966-1
3966-2
3966-2
3966-2
Mod
X
X
Demod.
X
Interface
Type
QPSK
8PSK/
16QAM
The current main assemblies, options, and alternates for the modem are listed in the table below:
Comments Part
Number
AS/3965
PL/3966-1
PL/3966-2
PL/3978
PL/2305
PL/4124-1
PL/4124-2
PL/4109
PL/4110
Description
Assy, Top SDM-9000
Assy, Chassis, AC
Assy, Chassis, DC
Motherboard
Display/Monitor & Control
Filter, Nyquist TX
Filter, Nyquist RX
Supply, Power AC
Supply, Power AC
CE Mark
No FW/ included
Alternate
Preferred
The following table outlines the options available for a specific SDM-9000 configuration:
Output
50
75
50
75
50
75
50
75
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
Oscillator Data
Format
Standard
Standard
Standard
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
QPSK
Standard QPSK
HI Stability QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
HI Stability QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
HI Stability QPSK
HI Stability QPSK
Mod P/N
3969-1
3969-2
3969-3
3969-4
3969-5
3969-6
3969-7
3969-8
RF Mod
P/N
3995-33
3995-34
3995-33
3995-34
3995-37
3995-38
3995-37
3995-38
Demod
P/N
3970-1
RF Demod
P/N
4401-31
3970-2
3970-3
3970-4
3970-1
3970-2
3970-3
3970-4
4401-32
4401-31
4401-32
4401-31
4401-32
4401-31
4401-32
1–8 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Introduction
The following table reflects the relationship of the interface card (MIL-STD-188) with
Reed-Solomon:
Condition
Base
Buffer
Buffer with ESC
Buffer with Reed Solomon
ESC with Reed-Solomon
Interface Card
(MIL-STD-188)
P/N
4477-13
4477-23
4477-33
4477-23
4477-33
Reed-
Solomon
(IDR STD)
P/N
Reed
Solomon
(DVB STD)
P/N
4080
4080
4524
4524
The following table reflects the relationship of the interface card (ECL) with
Reed-Solomon:
Reed Solomon
(IDR STD)
P/N
Reed
Solomon
(DVB STD)
P/N Condition
Base
Buffer
ESC
Buffer with Reed Solomon
ESC with Reed-Solomon
ECL P/N
4477-11
4477-21
4477-31
4477-21
4477-31
4080
4080
4524
4524
The following table reflects the relationship of the interface card (G.703) with
Reed-Solomon:
Reed Solomon
(IDR STD)
P/N
Reed
Solomon
(DVB STD)
P/N Condition
Base
Buffer
ESC
Buffer with Reed Solomon
ESC with Reed-Solomon
Without Buffer
Buffer, 8 Mbit/s
ESC, 64kbit/s, 8 Mbit/s
G.703 P/N
3971-1
3971-2
3971-3
3971-2
3971-3
5618-1
5618-2
5618-3
4080
4080
4080
4080
4524
4524
4524
4524
Rev. 4 1–9
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
1.3 Modem Specifications
Table 1-1 lists the operating specifications of the modem.
Table 1 -1. SDM-9000 Specifications
Operating Frequency Range
Modulation Types
Operating Channel Spacing
General Specifications
50 to 180 MHz, synthesized in 2.5 kHz steps
•
QPSK at 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 rates
•
8PSK trellis at 2/3 and 5/6 rates (optional)
•
16QAM at 3/4 and 7/8 rates (optional)
Less than 0.5 dB degradation operating with 2 adjacent like channels, each 10 dB higher at 1.3 times the symbol rate
See Tables 1-2 through 1-4 BER
Baseband Interface:
MIL-STD-188
ECL
G.703
Elastic Buffer
Digital Data Rate
Scrambling/Descrambling Types
Forward Error Correction:
Viterbi K=7
Reed-Solomon
Pragmatic Trellis
M&C
Filter Mask Types
ESC
Loopback Modes
Diagnostic Features
Prime Power
Size
Weight
6 to 13 Mbit/s
6 to 51.84 Mbit/s
8.448 Mbit/s
32.064 Mbit/s
34.368 Mbit/s
44.736 Mbit/s
51.840 Mbit/s
2 to 32 ms, selectable from front panel
6.0 to 51.84 Mbit/s, in 1 bit steps
•
V.35 (per CCITT V.35)
•
IDR (per IESS-308)
•
EFD (SDM-450 compatible)
Rates:
1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Optional
2/3 and 5/6
Front panel display (16 character by 2 rows)
INTELSAT
IDR or None, field selectable
•
Baseband (near end)
•
Interface (near end and far end)
•
IF/RF
•
•
IF/RF
Baseband/Interface
•
Fault monitoring (includes current/stored faults)
•
BER
•
Input IF power monitoring
•
Buffer fill status monitoring
•
Remote control via serial port
90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz,
200W maximum, fused at 2A
38 to 64 VDC
Physical
3.5” H x 19.0” W x 20.0” D (2 RU) (see Figure 2-1)
19 lbs. (approximate)
1–10 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Introduction
Temperature Range
Humidity
Signals Monitored
Configuration Retention
Addressing
Environmental
0 to 50
°
C
0 to 95%, noncondensing
Additional Modulator Specifications
Output Power
Output Spurious and Harmonics -55 dBc
Output Impedance 75
Ω
(50
Ω
optional)
Output Return Loss
-20 to +5 dBm, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps
Accuracy ± 0.5 dB
Output Frequency Stability
Internal Data Clock Stability
> 18 dB
±
10 PPM (
±
0.2 PPM with high stability option)
±
±
10 PPM internal oscillator
0.2 PPM with high stability option
Additional Demodulator Specifications
Input Power (Desired Carrier)
Input Impedance
Input Return Loss
Carrier Acquisition Range
Clock Acquisition Range
-45 to -25 dBm
75
Ω
(50
Ω
optional)
> 18 dB
±
±
60 kHz maximum
100 PPM
Remote Control Specifications
Serial Interface
Baud Rate
Functions Controlled
RS-232-C or RS-485
110 to 19200 bit/s
•
Transmit/Receive
•
Transmit
• Transmitter
•
Data
•
RF/IF
•
Baseband/Interface
•
Scrambler/Descrambler types
• on/off
•
Buffer clock TX/RX/INT/EXT
•
Receive clock normal/invert
•
Differential encoding and decoding
•
Transmit and receive overhead type
•
IDR backward alarm control on/off
•
Reed-Solomon
•
Mod and demod spectrum norm/invert
•
Sweep width range
•
Rev emulation current/functional
•
Raw error rate
•
Corrected
•
E b
BER
Receive /N
0
•
Receive signal level
•
Receive carrier detect
•
Power supply voltages
•
Fault status
•
Current sweep value
• Stored fault status
Will maintain current configuration for at least one year without power
Programmable to 1 of 255 possibilities; address 0 reserved for global addressing
Note: Local control of all remote functions included by push-button entry.
Rev. 4 1–11
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
1.4 BER Performance Specifications
The bit energy-to-noise ratios (E b
/N
0
) required to achieve 10 -3 to 10 -10 Bit Error Rates
(BERs) are listed in Tables 1-2 through 1-4. The BER performance curves are shown in the following figures:
Figure
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
Modulation
QPSK
QPSK (with Reed-Solomon)
8PSK (with Reed-Solomon)
16QAM (with Reed-Solomon)
1.4.1 Viterbi Decoder BER (QPSK)
The Viterbi specifications for the E b
/N
0
required to achieve 10 -3 to 10 -8
BER for different coding configurations are shown in Table 1-2. All values are for operation in QPSK mode.
Performance measurements are recorded with transmit and receive IF connected back-to-back through an additive white Gaussian noise channel. Refer to Figure 1-4 for the Viterbi BER curves.
Table 1-2. Viterbi Decoder BER Data
BER
10 -3
10 -4
10 -5
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
BER
10 -3
10 -4
10 -5
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
Specification
1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
4.2 dB
4.8 dB
5.4 dB
6.0 dB
6.6 dB
7.2 dB
5.2 dB
6.0 dB
6.7 dB
7.5 dB
8.2 dB
8.8 dB
6.4 dB
7.2 dB
7.9 dB
8.6 dB
9.2 dB
9.9 dB
Typical
1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
3.8 dB
4.2 dB
4.9 dB
5.5 dB
6.1 dB
6.7 dB
4.8 dB
5.5 dB
6.1 dB
6.7 dB
7.6 dB
8.2 dB
6.0 dB
6.6 dB
7.3 dB
8.0 dB
8.6 dB
9.3 dB
1–12 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Introduction
10
-2
10
-3
10
-4
10
-5
10
-6
BER
10
-7
10
-8
10
-9
10
-10
1/2 RATE 3/4 RATE 7/8 RATE
SPECIFICATIONS
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
E b
/N
0
(dB)
8.0
9.0
Figure 1-4. Viterbi BER Performance Curves (QPSK)
10.0
11.0
Rev. 4 1–13
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
1.4.2 Reed-Solomon Codec BER (QPSK)
The Reed-Solomon specifications for the E b
/N
0
required to achieve 10 -6 to 10 -10 BER for different configurations are shown in Table 1-3. All values are for QPSK mode operation. Refer to Figure 1-5 for the Reed-Solomon BER curves.
Table 1-3. Reed-Solomon BER Data
Specification
BER 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
10 -10
4.1 dB
4.2 dB
4.4 dB
4.7 dB
5.6 dB
5.8 dB
6.0 dB
6.4 dB
6.7 dB
6.9 dB
7.1 dB
7.5 dB
Typical
BER 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
10 -10
3.5 dB
3.6 dB
3.8 dB
4.1 dB
5.0 dB
5.2 dB
5.4 dB
5.8 dB
6.1 dB
6.3 dB
6.5 dB
6.9 dB
1–14 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Introduction
10
-2
10
-3
10
-4
10
-5
10
-6
BER
10
-7
10
-8
10
-9
10
-10
3.0
4.0
1/2 RATE 3/4 RATE 7/8 RATE
5.0
SPECIFICATIONS
6.0
7.0
E b
/N
0
(dB)
8.0
9.0
Figure 1-5. Reed-Solomon BER Performance Curves (QPSK)
10.0
11.0
Rev. 4 1–15
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
1.4.3 8PSK and 16QAM (Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon Codec)
The 8PSK and 16QAM specifications for the E b
/N
0
required to achieve 10 -6 to 10 -9 BER with the Viterbi decoder and Reed-Solomon Codec are shown in Table 1-4. Refer to
Figures 1-6 (8PSK) and 1-7 (16QAM) for the BER curves with the Reed-Solomon option.
Table 1-4. 8PSK and 16QAM BER Data
8PSK
Specification
8PSK 16QAM 16QAM
BER 2/3 Rate 5/6 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
10 -9
6.1 dB
6.4 dB
6.6 dB
6.9 dB
8.2 dB
8.5 dB
8.9 dB
9.3 dB
8.3 dB
8.5 dB
8.7 dB
8.9 dB
9.8 dB
10.0 dB
10.3 dB
10.5 dB
8PSK
Typical
8PSK 16QAM 16QAM
BER 2/3 Rate 5/6 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10 -6
10 -7
10 -8
10 -9
5.6 dB
5.8 dB
6.1 dB
6.3 dB
7.7 dB
7.9 dB
8.4 dB
8.7 dB
7.8 dB
8.1 dB
8.3 dB
8.6 dB
9.4 dB
9.7 dB
9.9 dB
10.2 dB
1–16 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Introduction
10
-6
BER
10
-7
10
-8
10
-9
10
-10
10
-2
10
-3
10
-4
10
-5
2/3 RATE
(WITH R-S)
SPECIFICATIONS
5/6 RATE
(WITH R-S)
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
E b
/N
0
(dB)
8.0
9.0
10.0
Figure 1-6. 8PSK BER Performance Curves (with Reed-Solomon)
11.0
Rev. 4 1–17
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
10
-6
BER
10
-7
10
-8
10
-9
10
-10
10
-2
10
-3
10
-4
10
-5
3/4 RATE
(WITH R-S)
7/8 RATE
(WITH R-S)
SPECIFICATIONS
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
E b
/N
0
(dB)
9.0
10.0
11.0
Figure 1-7. 16QAM BER Performance Curves (with Reed-Solomon)
12.0
1–18 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A typical spectral occupancy curve is shown in Figure 1-8.
Introduction
Rev. 4
Figure 1-8. SDM-9000 Typical Spectral Occupancy
1–19
Introduction SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
This page is intentionally left blank.
1–20 Rev. 4
Rev. 4
2
Chapter 2.
INSTALLATION
This chapter includes instructions for unpacking and installing the modem, a description of the external connections, and backward alarm information.
CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting PCBs.
2.1 Unpacking
The modem and manual are packaged in preformed, reusable cardboard cartons containing foam spacing for maximum shipping protection. The circuit cards are packed in separate cardboard caddypacks (also packaged within the cardboard carton).
Do not use any cutting tool that will extend more than 1” into the container and cause damage to the modem.
CAUTION
To remove the modem:
1. Cut the tape at the top of the carton (indicated by OPEN THIS END).
2. Remove the cardboard/foam spacer covering the modem and caddypacks.
3. Remove the modem, caddypacks, manual, and power cord from carton.
4. Save the packing material for storage or reshipment purposes.
5. Inspect the equipment for any possible damage incurred during shipment.
6. Check the equipment against the packing list to ensure the shipment is complete.
7. Refer to Section 2.2 for further system installation instructions.
2–1
Installation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2.2 System Options
The standard SDM-9000 with all PCB assemblies installed (Chapter 1) is a full-duplex
QPSK satellite modem. The system can also be configured for TX-only or RX-only operation.
1. For a TX-only system, the demodulator PCB (AS/3970) should be removed.
•
Enter the System Utility menu on the front panel and select Operation mode.
•
Enter the menu and select TX-only. This will mask the RX faults and stored faults in the Faults menu.
2. For RX-only system, the modulator PCB (AS/3969) should be removed.
•
Enter the System Utility menu on the front panel and select Operation mode.
•
Enter the menu and select RX-only. This will mask the TX faults and stored faults in the Faults menu.
2–2 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Installation
2.3 System Installation
Install the modem as follows:
1. Mount the modem chassis in the assigned position of the equipment rack. It is recommended that the modem be supported by a rack-mounted shelf, or the two rear rack-mount brackets supplied with the unit.
Note: For a custom rack installation, refer to the chassis dimensional drawing in
Figure 2-1.
2. Connect the cables to the proper locations on the rear panel. Refer to Section 2.4
for connector pinouts, placement, and functions.
3. Open the front panel and install the three main PCB assemblies (Figure 1-2) as follows: a. Install the modulator PCB (AS/3969) in the top slot.
b. Install the interface PCB (AS/3971, AS/4477, or AS/5618) in the middle slot.
c.
Install the demodulator PCB (AS/3970) in the bottom slot.
Note: The cards are keyed, and will only fit in the proper chassis slot. Verify the PCBs are properly seated.
4. Before turning on the power switch, verify all interface jumper settings are in their proper positions (Chapter 3), and become familiar with front panel operation (Chapter 4).
5. Turn on the power switch (located inside the front panel).
6. Check for the proper TX output signal level and spectrum.
7. Check for the proper RX input signal level and spectrum.
8. If there is any installation problem, refer to Chapter 6 for troubleshooting assistance.
Rev. 4 2–3
Installation
Note: All dimensions are listed in inches.
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2–4
Figure 2-1. SDM-9000 Dimensional Drawing
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Installation
2.4 External Connectors
When a breakout panel is not required, the external modem connections between the modem and other equipment are made through several rear panel connectors. These connectors are shown in Figure 2-2, and their locations are listed in Table 2-1. The connectors are described in the following paragraphs.
When a B141-1 breakout panel is required, refer to the B141-1 Breakout Panel
Installation and Operation Manual for connector information.
Rev. 4
Figure 2-2. SDM-9000 Rear Panel View
Note: In order to meet the European EMC Directive (EN55022, EN50082-1), properly shielded cables for DATA I/O are required. These cables must be double-shielded from end to end, ensuring a continuous ground shield.
Name
Table 2-1. Modem Rear Panel Connectors
TX/IF OUTPUT
RX/IF INPUT
RECEIVE DATA
SEND DATA
EXT CLK
REMOTE
FAULTS
DATA I/O
AUX1
ALARMS
Ref.
Desig.
Connector
Type
CP1 BNC
CP2 BNC
CP3 BNC
CP4 BNC
CP5 BNC
J6
J7
J8
J9
9-pin D
9-pin D
50-pin D
9-pin D
J10 9-pin D
Function
RF output
RF input
RX terrestrial data input
TX terrestrial data input
External clock input
Remote interface
Form C fault relay contacts
Data I/O (ESC)
TTL faults
External reference
AGC output
Form C alarm relay contacts
2–5
Installation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2.4.1 TX/IF Output (CP1)
The TX/IF output connection is a BNC connector used for the transmit IF signal. The output impedance is 75
Ω
(50
Ω
optional). The output power level is +5 to -20 dBm.
In normal operation, the output is a modulated carrier with center frequency between 50 and 180 MHz.
2.4.2 RX/IF Input (CP2)
The RX/IF input connection is a BNC connector used for the receive IF signal. The input impedance is 75
Ω
(50
Ω
optional). For normal operation, the desired carrier signal level should be between -25 and -45 dBm.
The signal frequency of the receive RX/IF input is between 50 and 180 MHz.
2.4.3 Receive Data (CP3)
The Receive Data connection is a BNC connector used for the terrestrial data output
(G.703 interface only). The output impedance is 75 Ω .
2.4.4 Send Data (CP4)
The Send Data connection is a BNC connector used for the terrestrial data input (G.703
interface only). The input impedance is 75
Ω
.
2.4.5 External Clock (CP5)
The External Clock connection is a BNC connector used for the external buffer clock input (Ext Clk). The input impedance is 75
Ω
. This input is used for the G.703 interface only. The external clock input for ECL/MIL-STD-188 interfaces is provided on the J8 connector.
2–6 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Installation
2.4.6 Remote (J6)
The remote connector is used to interface the M&C functions to a remote location. This is a Data Circuit Terminating Equipment (DCE) interface that can be either RS-232-C or
RS-485. Refer to Appendix B for remote control operation information.
The remote interface connection is a 9-pin female D connector located on the rear panel of the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security of the mating connector.
RS-485
4-Wire Mode
Pin # Name
2-Wire Mode
Name
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
GND
+TX
-TX
+RX
-RX
GND
+RX/TX
-RX/TX
+RX/TX
-RX/TX
Pin #
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
RS-232-C
Name
RD (RX)
TD (TX)
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
Rev. 4 2–7
Installation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2.4.7 Fault (J7)
The fault connector is used to provide Form C contact closures for fault reporting. The three Form C summary fault contacts are:
•
•
•
Transmit faults
Receive faults
Common equipment faults
Refer to Chapter 4 for a discussion of faults monitored. To obtain a system summary fault, connect all the Form C contacts in parallel
The fault interface connection is a 9-pin female D connector located on the rear panel of the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security on the mating connector.
Signal Function Name Pin #
Common equipment is OK NO
Common COM
Common equipment is faulted NC
Transmit is OK NO
Common
Transmit is faulted
Receive is OK
Common
Receive is faulted
COM
NC
NO
COM
NC
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
Note: A connection between the common (COM) and normally open (NO) contacts indicates no fault.
2–8 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Installation
2.4.8 DATA I/O (ESC) Interface (J8)
The DATA I/O (ESC) connection is a 50-pin female D connector located on the rear panel of the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security of the mating connector.
•
•
•
•
The J8 connector is used to interface data input/output and ESC signals to and from the modem. The configuration of J8 depends on the following interface types:
G.703
ECL
PECL
MIL-STD-188
The DATA I/O pinout will be different for each of the interface configurations. The interface pinouts are listed in the following sections. Refer to the following Notes for additional data applying to each condition.
Notes:
1. Backward alarm relay contacts named for normal no-fault condition
(BWOx–C connected to BWOx–NC if no fault).
2. Backward alarm inputs must be grounded or pulled logic low to clear alarm.
3. Signals MF, DF, and DMA are open-collector high-impedance, if faulted. MF and DF are used by M:N protection switch, if used in redundant system.
4. Relay contacts DF–C and DF–NO named for faulted condition (DF–C connected to DF–NO unless Demod fault).
Rev. 4 2–9
Installation
2.4.8.1 G.703 (IDR) Interface (J8) (Audio Mode)
Signal Function Name Pin #
Ground
8 kbit/s TX data input (RS-422)
8 kHz TX clock output (RS-422)
1 kHz TX octet input (RS-422)
TXC–A
TXC–B
TXO–A
TXO–B
8 kbit/s RX data output (RS-422) RXD–A
RXD–B
8 kHz RX clock output (RS-422)
GND
TXD–A
TXD–B
1 kHz RX octet output (RS-422)
ADPCM 1 audio input
RXC–A
RXC–B
RXO–A
RXO–B
A1I–A
A1I–B
ADPCM 1 audio output
ADPCM 2 audio input
ADPCM 2 audio output
Backward alarm 1 output
Backward alarm 2 output
A1O–A
A1O–B
A2I–A
A2I–B
A2O–A
A2O–B
BWO1–C 8
BWO1–NC 25
BWO1–NO 41
BWO2–C 9
BWO2–NC 26
BWO2–NO 42
46
30
47
31
48
32
6
7
23
24
45
29
1, 2
37
38
4
5
21
22
39
40
Backward alarm 3 output
Backward alarm 4 output
Backward alarm 1 input
Backward alarm 2 input
Backward alarm 3 input
Backward alarm 4 input
Modulator fault (TTL)
Demodulator fault (TTL)
Deferred maintenance alarm
Demodulator fault relay
AGC output
(receive input, if level)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
BWO3–C 10 (Note 1)
BWO3–NC 27
BWO3–NO 43
BWO4–C 11 (Note 1)
BWO4–NC 28
BWO4–NO 44
BWI1
BWI2
BWI3
BWI4
MF
12 (Note 2)
13 (Note 2)
14
(Note 2)
15 (Note 2)
49 (Note 3)
DF
DMA
DF–C
DF–NO
AGC–OUT 3
33 (Note 3)
17 (Note 3)
16 (Note 4)
50
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2–10 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2.4.8.2 G.703 (IDR) Interface (J8) (64 kbit/s Mode)
Signal Function Name Pin #
Ground
8 kbit/s TX data input (RS-422)
8 kHz TX clock output (RS-422)
1 kHz TX octet input (RS-422)
8 kbit/s RX data output (RS-422)
8 kHz RX clock output (RS-422)
1 kHz RX octet output (RS-422)
RXC–A
RXC–B
RXO–A
RXO–B
64 kbit/s send data input (RS-422) E-SD-A
E-SD-B
64 kHz receive timing out
(RS-422)
64 kHz send timing out (RS-422)
E-RT-A
E-RT-B
E-ST-A
E-ST-B
64 kbit/s receive data out (RS-422) E-RD-A
E-RD-B
Backward alarm 1 output
Backward alarm 2 output
BWO1–C 8
BWO1–NC 25
BWO1–NO 41
BWO2–C 9
BWO2–NC 26
BWO2–NO 42
6
7
23
24
45
29
46
30
47
31
48
32
Backward alarm 3 output
Backward alarm 4 output
GND
TXD–A
TXD–B
TXC–A
TXC–B
TXO–A
TXO–B
RXD–A
RXD–B
1, 2
37
38
4
5
21
22
39
40
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
BWO3–C 10 (Note 1 )
BWO3–NC 27
BWO3–NO 43
BWO4–C 11 (Note 1)
BWO4–NC 28
BWO4–NO 44
Backward alarm 1 input
Backward alarm 2 input
Backward alarm 3 input
Backward alarm 4 input
Modulator fault (TTL)
Demodulator fault (TTL)
Deferred maintenance alarm
Demodulator fault relay
AGC output
(receive input, if level)
BWI1
BWI2
BWI3
BWI4
MF
DF
DMA
DF–C
DF–NO
AGC–OUT
12 (Note 2)
13 (Note 2)
14
(Note 2)
15 (Note 2)
49 (Note 3)
33 (Note 3)
17 (Note 3)
16 (Note 4)
50
3
Installation
Rev. 4 2–11
Installation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2.4.8.3 ECL Interface (J8)
Signal Function
Ground
Send data input
Terrestrial timing input (TT)
SYNC TX frame input (TX SYNC)
Send timing output (ST)
Receive data output (RD)
Receive timing output (RT)
SYNC RX frame output (RX SYNC)
External clock input (EXC)
ADPCM 1 audio input
ADPCM 1 audio output
ADPCM 2 audio input
ADPCM 2 audio output
Backward alarm 1 output
Backward alarm 2 output
Backward alarm 3 output
Backward alarm 4 output
Backward alarm 1 input
Backward alarm 2 input
Backward alarm 3 input
Backward alarm 4 input
Modulator fault (TTL)
Demodulator fault (TTL)
Deferred maintenance Alarm
Demodulator fault relay
AGC output (receive input, if level)
Name Pin #
GND
TXD–A (ECL-)
1, 2
37
TXD–B (ECL+) 38
TXO–A (ECL-) 4
TXO–B (ECL+) 5
SD–A (ECL-)
SD–B (ECL+)
34
18
TXC–A (ECL-) 21
TXC–B (ECL+) 22
RXD–A (ECL-) 39
RXD–B (ECL+) 40
RXC–A (ECL-) 23
RXC–B (ECL+) 24
RD–A (ECL-)
RD–B (ECL+)
EXC- (ECL-)
EXC+ (ECL+)
A1I–A
A1I–B
A1O–A
A1O–B
A2I–A
A2I–B
A2O–A
A2O–B
BWO1–C
BWO1–NC
BWO1–NO
BWO2–C
BWO2–NC
BWO2–NO
BWO3–C
BWO3–NC
BWO3–NO
BWO4–C
BWO4–NC
BWO4–NO
BWI1
BWI2
BWI3
BWI4
MF
DF
DMA
DF–C
DF–NO
AGC–OUT
46
30
47
31
48
32
36
20
35
19
45
29
8
25
41
9
26
42
(Note 1 )
(Note 1 )
10 (Note 1)
27
43
11 (Note 1)
28
44
12 (Note 2)
13 (Note 2 )
14
(Note 2)
15 (Note 2)
49 (Note 3)
33
(Note 3 )
17 (Note 3)
16 (Note 4 )
50
3
2–12 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2.4.8.4 MIL-STD-188 Interface (J8)
Signal Function
Ground
Send data input
Terrestrial timing input (TT)
Request to send input (RTS)
Send timing output (ST)
Receive data output (RD)
Receive timing output (RT)
Data mode output (DM/DSR)
External clock input (EXC)
Receiver ready output (RR/RLSD)
ADPCM 1 audio input
ADPCM 1 audio output
ADPCM 2 audio input
ADPCM 2 audio output
Backward alarm 1 output
Backward alarm 2 output
Backward alarm 3 output
Backward alarm 4 output
Backward alarm 1 input
Backward alarm 2 input
Backward alarm 3 input
Backward alarm 4 input
Modulator fault (TTL)
Demodulator fault (TTL)
Deferred maintenance alarm
Demodulator fault relay
AGC output (receive input, if level)
Name
GND
TXD–A
TXD–B
TXO–A
TXO–B
SD–A
SD–B
TXC–A
TXC–B
RXD–A
RXD–B
RXC–A
RXC–B
RD–A
RD–B
EXC-
EXC+
RXO–A
RXO–B
A1I–A
A1I–B
A1O–A
A1O–B
A2I–A
A2I–B
A2O–A
A2O–B
BWO1–C
BWO1–NC
BWO1–NO
BWO2–C
BWO2–NC
BWO2–NO
BWO3–C
BWO3–NC
BWO3–NO
BWO4–C
BWO4–NC
BWO4–NO
BWI1
BWI2
BWI3
BWI4
MF
DF
DMA
DF–C
DF–NO
AGC–OUT
Pin #
34
18
21
22
39
40
23
24
1, 2
37
38
4
5
45
29
46
30
47
31
6
7
36
20
35
19
48
32
8
25
41
9
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
26
42
10 (Note 1)
27
43
11 (Note 1)
28
44
12 (Note 2)
13 (Note 2)
14 (Note 2)
15
(Note 2)
49 (Note 3)
33 (Note 3)
17 (Note 3)
16 (Note 4)
50
3
Installation
Rev. 4 2–13
Installation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2.4.9 AUX 1 (J9)
The Auxiliary 1 (AUX 1) connector provides:
•
•
•
TTL faults
External high stability reference
AGC output voltage
The faults are open collector levels to indicate a modulator or demodulator failure. A logic 1 indicates the faulted condition. The signals are primarily used in operating a protection switch.
The external high stability reference clock input is 5, 10, or 20 MHz.
AGC-OUT is the voltage for a receive signal level between -25 and -50 dBm.
The AUX 1 connection is a 9-pin female D connector located on the rear panel of the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security on the mating connector.
Signal Function
Ground
External reference
Transmit fault
Receive fault
AGC output
(Receive input, IF level)
Name Pin #
GND
EXT–REF
MDTTLFLT 4
5, 6, 8
2
DMTTLFLT 7
AGC–OUT 1
2–14 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Installation
2.4.10 Alarms (J10)
The alarms connector is used to provide three Form C contact closures for alarm reporting, as follows:
•
•
•
Alarm 1 = Not used
Alarm 2 = TX
Alarm 3 = RX
The two Form C summary fault contacts currently used are:
•
•
Transmit alarm (Alarm 2)
Receive alarm (Alarm 3)
Refer to Chapter 4 for a discussion of alarms monitored. To obtain a system summary alarm, connect all the Form C contacts in parallel.
The alarms connection is a 9-pin female D connector located on the rear panel of the modem. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security on the mating connector.
Signal Function Name Pin #
Alarm 1 is OK
Common
NO
COM
Alarm 1 is faulted NC
Alarm 2 is OK
Common
NO
COM
Alarm 2 is faulted NC
Alarm 3 is OK
Common
NO
COM
Alarm 3 is faulted NC
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
8
9
Note: A connection between the common (COM) and normally open (NO) contacts indicates no alarm.
Rev. 4 2–15
Installation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
2.4.11 AC Power
The AC power is supplied to the modem by a standard detachable, non-locking, 3-prong power cord (IEC plug). Normal input voltage is 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz. The power supply will automatically switch between ranges. Maximum power consumption is less than 200W.
2.4.12 DC Power
The DC power is supplied to the modem by a standard detachable, non-locking, 3-prong power cord (IEC plug). Normal input voltage is 38 to 64 VDC.
2.4.13 Ground (GND)
A #10-32 stud on the rear panel of the modem is used for connecting a common chassis ground between all equipment.
Note: The safety ground is provided through the AC power connector.
2–16 Rev. 4
Rev.4
3
Chapter 3.
CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes the hardware and software configuration of the modem.
Note: All jumper settings are described in their appropriate tables.
3.1 Display/M&C
The Display/M&C PCB (AS/2305) is located on the front panel of the modem.
Figure 3-1 shows the Display/M&C card and the jumper locations. The jumper settings are listed in Table 3-1.
All modem functions can be remotely controlled and monitored via an RS-485/
RS-232-C communications link. The 2- or 4-wire, half-duplex RS-485 interface makes it possible to operate 1 to 255 modems on a common communications link. The RS-232-C interface is used to communicate with a single modem.
The M&C module must be hardware configured to one of the two interfaces as listed in
Table 3-1.
3–1
Configuration SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
ASSEMBLY NUMBER AND
SERIAL NUMBER
JP1 JP3 JP2 JP5 JP9 JP10
Figure 3-1. Display/M&C PCB
Table 3-1. Display/M&C PCB Jumper Settings
Jumper Position
JP1 1 to 2
3 to 4
5 to 6
7 to 8
JP2 (See Note ) 1 to 2
2 to 3
JP3 (See Note) 1 to 2
2 to 3
JP5
JP9 and JP10
1 to 2
2 to 3
32K
64K
128K
256K
256K
Function
RS-485 Remote
RS-485 Remote
RS-232-C Remote
RS-232-C Remote
4-Wire
2-Wire
4-Wire
2-Wire
RS-485 Remote
RS-232-C Remote
27C256 EEPROM at U17
27C512 EEPROM at U17
27C010 EEPROM at U17
27C020 EEPROM at U17
27C040 EEPROM at U17
Note: Pins JP2 and JP3 must be in the 4-wire position for RS-232-C.
RS-485 Configuration Install two jumpers (shunts) at the RS-485 positions of JP1, and install one jumper at the RS-485 position of JP5.
For 2- or 4-wire operation, position jumpers at JP2 and JP3 to the designated positions.
RS-232-C Configuration Install two jumpers (shunts) at the RS-232-C positions of JP1, and install one jumper at the RS-232-C position of JP5.
Install jumpers at JP2 and JP3 for 4-wire operation.
3–2 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Configuration
3.2 Modulator
The modulator PCB (AS/3969) is located in the top slot of the modem chassis. The jumper settings are listed in Table 3-2. Figure 3-2 shows the modulator card and the jumper locations.
Table 3-2. Modulator PCB Jumper Settings
Jumper
J7
J9
(EEPROM size select)
Position
1 to 2
2 to 3
1 to 2
2 to 3
Function
Normal, processor control
Output forced ON, test mode
27C512 (64K EEPROM)
27C256 (32K EEPROM)
Note: The modulator PCB jumpers in Table 3-2 are factory set.
Rev.4
Figure 3-2. Modulator PCB (AS/3969)
3–3
Configuration SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
3.3 Demodulator
The demodulator PCB (AS/3970) is located in the bottom slot of the modem chassis. The jumper settings are listed in Table 3-3. Figure 3-3 shows the demodulator card and the location of jumper JP5.
Table 3-3. Demodulator PCB Jumper Settings
Jumper Position
JP5 (EEPROM size select) 1 to 2
2 to 3
Function
27C256 (32K EEPROM)
27C512 (64K EEPROM)
Note: The demodulator PCB jumpers in Table 3-3 are factory set.
3–4
Figure 3-3. Demodulator PCB (AS/3970)
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Configuration
3.4 Interface
The interface PCB (AS/3971, AS/4477, or AS/5618) is located in the middle slot of the modem chassis. The three interface configurations are:
AS/3971
AS/4477
AS/5618-3
G.703
ECL/MIL-STD-188-144
G.703 with 64 kbit/s ESC
Note: The AS/5618-3 G.703 interface assembly supports one 64 kbit/s data channel or two 32 kbit/s audio channels (per IESS-308, Rev. 8A). The modem can provide independent transmit (TX) and receive (RX) of audio or digital 64 kbit/s data. This allows four possible applications:
•
TX and RX: one 64 kbit/s data channel
•
TX and RX: two 32 kbit/s audio channels
•
TX: one 64 kbit/s data channel while RX: two 32 kbit/s audio channels
•
TX: two 32 kbit/s audio channels while RX: one 64 kbit/s data channel
The jumper settings are listed in Table 3-4. Figure 3-4 (AS/3971) and Figure 3-5
(AS/4477) show the interface cards and the locations of jumper JP1.
See Table 3-4 for the appropriate jumper settings for a particular application.
Table 3-4. Interface Configuration Jumper Settings
Jumper
AS/3971 Interface Only
Position Function
JP1 (EEPROM size select)
Channel
1 to 2
2 to 3
27C256 (32K EEPROM)
27C512 (64K EEPROM)
AS/5618-3 G.703 Interface Only
Jumper Position Function
TX
RX
JP7
(Jumper block)
JP6
(Jumper block)
1 to 2
2 to 3
1 to 2
2 to 3
64 kbit/s
Audio
64 kbit/s
Audio
Note: See options, Appendix A for additional timing information.
Rev.4
3–5
Configuration SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
JP1
3–6
Figure 3-4. Interface PCB (AS/3971)
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Configuration
Figure 3-5. Interface PCB (AS/4477)
Rev.4
3–7
Configuration
JP7
JP6
JP1
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
3–8
Figure 3-6. Interface PCB (AS/5618)
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Configuration
3.5 Nyquist Filter Configuration
The Nyquist filter (AS/4124) is a 4.5” x 5.0” daughter card that is located on the modulator and demodulator PCBs. The filters are capable of supporting four data/code rate and modulation type combinations per card. There is one TX card and one RX card:
Type
TX PCB
RX PCB
Part Number
AS/4124-1
AS/4124-2
Used with
Baseband Modulator PCB (AS/3969)
Baseband Demodulator PCB (AS/3970)
The filters include a factory programmable device that contains:
•
Data Rates
•
Coding Rates
•
Symbol Rates
•
Options
This information is programmed into the filter PCB at calibration time. A label indicates the symbol rates of the populated filters. For example, a Nyquist filter may be required with four symbol rates as follows:
•
21.376 MHz
•
22.912 MHz
•
29.824 MHz
•
34.560 MHz
Configuration information is recovered from the filter PCBs during system power-up and initialization. The filter configuration information is available to the user. Refer to
Chapter 4 for the Configuration Modulator, Configuration Demodulator, and Utility menus.
Rev.4
3–9
Configuration SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
3.5.1 Compatibility
For proper modem operation, the installed interface, modulator, and demodulator must be compatible with the installed filters. Refer to the following table for baseband interface data rates.
Interface Type
G.703
ECL/PECL
MIL-STD-188
Data Rates
8.448 Mbit/s
32.064 Mbit/s
34.368 Mbit/s
44.736 Mbit/s
51.840 Mbit/s
6.0 to 52.0 Mbit/s, in 1 bit/s steps
6.0 to 13.0 Mbit/s, in 1 bit/s steps
3.5.2 Installation
Installation instructions for the field-installed Nyquist filters (AS/4124) include:
•
Unpacking/initial inspection
•
Tools required
•
Installation procedure
3.5.2.1 Unpacking Instructions
CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
PCBs.
1. Remove the Nyquist filter PCB and mounting hardware from the cardboard caddypack and anti-static material.
2. Check packing list to ensure the shipment is complete.
3. Inspect the Nyquist filter PCB for any shipping damage. Ensure all ICs are seated properly.
3–10 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Configuration
3.5.2.2 Tools Required
The following tool is required to accomplish the task of this section:
Tool
Driver, Nut
Description
1/4-inch
3.5.2.3 Installation Procedure
Note: The Nyquist filter PCB is field-replaceable to enable the user to install optional data rates.
1. Install the Nyquist filter PCB as a daughter card on the modulator or demodulator PCB as follows:
Type
TX PCB
RX PCB
Part Number
AS/4124-1
AS/4124-2
Used with
Baseband Modulator PCB (AS/3969)
Baseband Demodulator PCB (AS/3970) a.
Ensure that each filter has three 10-pin connectors for I/O and power.
b. Mount the card on the four standoffs with a 1/4” hex nut on each standoff to secure the PCB. Tighten each nut using the 1/4” nut driver.
2. Refer to Figure 3-7 for connector locations.
3.5.2.3.1 Nyquist Filter Removal
1. Remove the TX filter (AS/4124-1) or RX filter (AS/4124-2) as follows: a.
Open the modem front door and turn off the power.
b. Remove the modulator or demodulator PCB from the modem and place on a static-free work area.
c.
Remove the four 1/4” hex nuts that secure the filter card (AS/4124-X) using the 1/4” nut driver.
Note: Do not remove the screws and standoffs from the modulator or demodulator. Remove the four hex nuts only.
2. Carefully unplug the filter card from the modulator or demodulator connectors.
Rev.4
3–11
Configuration SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
3–12
Figure 3-7. Nyquist Filter Installation
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Configuration
3.5.2.3.2 Nyquist Filter Replacement
1. Replace the TX filter (AS/4124-1) or RX filter (AS/4124-2) as follows: a.
Remove the TX/RX filter card (AS/4124) in accordance with
Section 3.5.2.3.1.
b. Carefully install the TX/RX filter card on the three 10-pin connectors.
Note: The TX/RX filter cards are keyed for easy installation.
TX Filter
Connectors
RX Filter
Connectors
Filter Modulator Filter Demodulator
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP1
JP2
JP4
JP1
JP2
JP3
P1
P3
P2
CAUTION
Ensure the connector pins are not bent during installation.
c.
Install the four 1/4” hex nuts to the standoffs, and tighten using the 1/4” nut driver.
2. Install the modulator or demodulator in the modem.
Rev.4
3–13
Configuration SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
3.6 Software Configuration
This section consists of the following software information:
•
Revision emulation feature
•
Programming the remote baud rates/addresses
•
Modem defaults
3.6.1 Revision Emulation
The modem includes a revision emulation feature that allows the user to program an emulation mode of a previous functional revision. This feature is accessed through the
Utility Modem Type menu (refer to Chapter 4). The user can emulate Version 1.1.1
through the current version by selecting a functional number at the Rev. Emulation menu
(refer to Table 3-5).
Table 3-5. SDM-9000 Revision Emulation
Functional # Firmware # Description of Change
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
Software
Version
1.1.1
2.1.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
4.1.1
5.1.1
6.1.1
4100-1-
4100-1A
4100-1B
4100-1C
4100-1D
4100-1E
4100-1F
Original version
Software changes
Software changes
Correctional Setting
Software changes
Software changes
Software changes
Notes:
1. Programming a functional number (1 through X) eliminates all changes
(disables new features/options) for the later version numbers. For example, functional number 3 may eliminate some features/options for Version 4.1.1
or greater.
2. Programming Current Version (default) allows all features and options to operate (if installed).
3. The user must manually program the functional version on a cold-start
(default is Current Version).
4. Revision emulation will not affect some user interface changes that do not affect direct operation of the modem. For example: Configuration
Save/Recall; cosmetic changes; Test Mode screen in the Utility System menu; all Factory Setup modes, and so forth.
3–14 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Configuration
3.6.2 Remote Interface Specification
Refer to Appendix B for remote control operation information.
3.6.2.1 Remote Baud Rate
The remote communications baud rate and parity are programmed by the front panel control in the Utility System menu (refer to Chapter 4). The programmed baud rate and parity are maintained indefinitely by use of the EEPROM on the M&C module. The parity bits can be set to EVEN, ODD, or NONE (with 8 data bits). The available baud rates (bit/s) are listed below:
•
110
•
150
•
300
•
600
•
1200
•
2400
•
4800
•
9600
•
19200
3.6.2.2 Remote Address
To communicate with the established remote communications protocol, each modem must be configured for one address between 1 and 255. Address 0 is reserved as a global address that simultaneously addresses all devices on a given communications link. Each modem on a common remote communications link (RS-485) must have a distinct address.
The addresses are programmed by front panel control in the Utility System menu and maintained in EEPROM.
Rev.4
3–15
Configuration SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
3.6.3 Modem Defaults
With certain exceptions, the M&C default settings are loaded into the modem after a hard reset (refer to Chapter 4). The defaults are listed in Table 3-6.
In the case of the exceptions, the settings last saved are retained. Exceptions include the following:
•
Address
•
Parity
•
Baud Rate
•
Ext AGC: Minimum Pwr
•
Ext AGC: Maximum Pwr
•
Display Contrast
Table 3-6. Modem Defaults
Modulator Defaults
Data Rate
IF Frequency
IF Output
Mod Power Offset
TX Power Level
Differential Encoder
Carrier Mode
Mod Spectrum
(See Note) TX Rate A
70 MHz
OFF
0 dB
0.0 dBm
Data Rate
Demodulator Defaults
IF Frequency
Differential Decoder
IF Loopback
RF Loopback
ON BER Threshold
Normal (OFF) Demod Spectrum
Normal
Interface Defaults
(See Note) RX Rate A
70 MHz
ON
OFF
OFF
NONE
Normal
Buffer Clock Source
TX Clock Phase
RX Clock Phase
Ext-Ref Freq.
B-Band Loopback
Intrfc Loopback
TX Coding Format
RX Coding Format
TX 2047 Pattern
RX 2047 Pattern
TX Data Fault
RX Data Fault
Descrambler Type
Scrambler Type
RX Satellite Descrambler
Normal
Normal
Buffer Size
Service Channel TX1
5000.000 kHz Service Channel TX2
OFF
OFF
AMI
AMI
OFF
OFF
NONE
NONE
IDR
IDR
Service Channel RX1
Service Channel RX2
Loop Timing
TX Overhead Type
RX Overhead Type
TX Data Phase
RX Data Phase
IDR B/W Alarm Control
Scrambler
Scrambler Defaults
System Defaults
Operation Mode Duplex
Baud Rate
Parity
(See Note)
(See Note)
9600
EVEN
Ext AGC: Min Pwr (See Note) 10.0V
Remote Address (See Note) 1
Time
Date
Ext AGC: Max Pwr
12:00 AM
11/21/94
0.0V
ON
12 ms
-5 dBm
-5 dBm
-5 dBm
-5 dBm
OFF
NONE
NONE
Normal
Normal
ON
ON
ON
Note: All code rate/data rate information is read from the modulator/demodulator filter boards on power-up. If a board is missing or the filters were not installed per order,
“N/A” (Not Applicable) will be displayed on the front panel.
3–16 Rev. 4
Rev. 4
4
Chapter 4.
OPERATION
This chapter includes operational information for the front panel and the menu system.
4.1 Front Panel
The modem front panel (Figure 4-1) enables the user to control modem configuration parameters and display the modem status.
Figure 4-1. SDM-9000 Front Panel View
The major front panel features are:
•
32-character, 2-line LCD display
•
6-button keypad for providing sophisticated functions
•
10 LEDs to provide overall status at a glance
4–1
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
All functions are accessible at the front panel by entering one of five pre-defined
Function Select categories or levels:
•
Configuration
•
Monitor
•
Faults/Alarms
•
Stored Faults/Alarms
•
Utility
4.1.1 LED Indicators
General modem summary fault information, status, and alarms are indicated by the
10 LEDs on the front panel. The LEDs, when lit, indicate the following information:
LED
TX
RX
Common
Stored
Power ON
TX ON
Carrier Detect
Test Mode
TX
RX
Color
Red
Red
Red
Yellow
Green
Green
Green
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Description
Faults
A fault condition exists in the TX chain.
A fault condition exists in the RX chain.
A common equipment fault condition exists.
A fault has been logged and stored. The fault may be active.
Status
Power is applied to the modem.
TX is currently on. This indicator reflects the actual condition of the TX, as opposed to the programmed condition.
Decoder is locked.
Flashes when the modem is in a test configuration. The test mode status can be identified in the Utility System menu in
Figure 4-14.
Alarms
A TX function is in an alarm condition.
AN RX function is in an alarm condition.
4–2 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.1.2 Front Panel Controls
The modem is locally operated by using the front panel keypad (Figure 4-1). The keypad consists of six keys. Each key provides one or more logical functions:
Key Function
[ENTER] [ENTER] is used to select a displayed function or to execute a modem configuration change.
[CLEAR] [CLEAR] is used to back out of a selection or to cancel a configuration change which has not been executed using [ENTER]. Pressing [CLEAR] generally returns the display to the previous selection.
[
←
] and [
→
] These keys are used to move to the next selection or to move the cursor for certain functions.
[
↑
] and [
↓
] These keys are used primarily to change configuration data (numbers), but are also used at times to move from one section to another.
The modem responds by beeping whenever a key is pressed:
•
A single beep indicates a valid entry and the appropriate action was taken.
•
A double beep indicates an invalid entry or a parameter is not available.
The modem front panel control uses a tree-structured menu system (Figures 4-2 through
4-16) to access and execute all functions. The base level of this structure is the sign-on message that is displayed on the front panel when the modem power is turned on:
•
Line 1 of the sign-on message is the modem model number (SDM-9000).
•
Line 2 is the version number of the firmware implemented in the modem.
The main level of the menu system is Function Select. This may be accessed from the base level by pressing any of the arrow keys. From the Function Select menu, the user may select any one of five functional categories:
Note: The user should proceed to the Utility menu and establish the identity of the modem before proceeding with the Configuration menu.
•
Configuration
•
Monitor
•
Faults/Alarms
•
Stored Faults/Alarms
•
Utility
Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to move from one selection to another. When the desired function is displayed on line 2, select that level by pressing [ENTER]. After entering the appropriate functional level, move to the desired function by pressing [ ← ] or [ → ]. Refer to the following section for information on individual functional categories and their functions.
Rev. 4 4–3
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
4.2 Menu System
4–4
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
MODULATOR
(Figure 4-3)
CONFIGURATION
DEMODULATOR
(Figure 4-4)
CONFIGURATION
INTERFACE
(Figure 4-5)
CONFIGURATION
SAVE
(Figure 4-6)
CONFIGURATION
RECALL
(Figure 4-7)
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
FUNCTION SELECT
MONITOR
MONITOR
RAW BER
(Figure 4-8)
MONITOR
CORRECTED BER
(Figure 4-8)
MONITOR
EB/N0
(Figure 4-8)
MONITOR
RECEIVE SIGNAL
(Figure 4-8)
MONITOR
SWEEP
FREQUENCY
(Figure 4-8)
MONITOR
BUFFER FILL
(Figure 4-8)
FUNCTION SELECT
FAULTS/ALARMS
FUNCTION SELECT
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
FAULTS/ALARMS
MODULATOR
(Figure 4-9)
FAULTS/ALARMS
DEMODULATOR
(Figure 4-9)
FAULTS/ALARMS
TX INTERFACE
(Figure 4-9)
FAULTS/ALARMS
RX INTERFACE
(Figure 4-9)
FAULTS/ALARMS
COMMON
(Figure 4-9)
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
MODULATOR
(Figure 4-10)
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
DEMODULATOR
(Figure 4-10)
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
TX INTERFACE
(Figure 4-10)
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
RX INTERFACE
(Figure 4-10)
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
COMMON
(Figure 4-10)
FAULTS/ALARMS
BACKWARD ALARMS
(Figure 4-9)
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
BACKWARD ALARMS
(Figure 4-10)
FUNCTION SELECT
UTILITY
UTILITY
MODULATOR
(Figure 4-11)
UTILITY
DEMODULATOR
(Figure 4-12)
UTILITY
INTERFACE
(Figure 4-13)
UTILITY
SYSTEM
(Figure 4-14)
UTILITY
MODEM TYPE
(Figure 4-15)
UTILITY
FACTORY SETUP
(Figure 4-16)
MONITOR
FRAME ERRORS
(Figure 4-8)
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
UNAVAL SECONDS
(Figure 4-10)
STORED
FAULTS/ALARMS
CLEAR???
(Figure 4-10)
Figure 4-2. Main Menu
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.1 Configuration
Refer to the menu trees (Figures 4-3 through 4-7) for configuration changes. Modem configuration may be viewed or changed by entering the Configuration level from the
Function Select menu on the front panel. Once in the Configuration menu, press [ ← ] or
[ → ] to select one of the following configurations:
•
Modulator
•
Demodulator
•
Interface
•
Save
•
Recall
Enter the selected configuration menu by pressing [ENTER]. Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to view the selected configuration parameters. If a configuration parameter change is required, press
[ENTER] to begin the change process.
Press the arrow keys to change the parameters. After the display represents the correct parameters, execute the change by pressing [ENTER]. This action initiates the necessary programming by the modem.
To cancel a parameter prior to executing the change, simply press [CLEAR].
Notes:
1. Hardware configuration may change the front panel menu selection (all front panel configuration windows are listed in the following paragraphs).
2. If a particular window is specific to a certain modem configuration, the user will not be able to enter that window unless that configuration is selected. This eliminates incompatible parameters from accidentally being set in the different modes of operation.
Rev. 4 4–5
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
MODULATOR
TX-X CODE_RATE x = FILTER A, B, C, or D
See table below for code rate and data rate range.
TX-IF FREQUENCY
70.000 MHz
50 to 180 MHz in 2.5 kHz steps.
TX-IF OUTPUT
ON
OFF
TX POWER LEVEL
+5 to -20 dBm (no offset) or
-5.0 to -30.0 dBm
(offset, fixed user, total range)
DIFF. ENCODER
ON
OFF
CARRIER MODE
(TEST MODE
CONFIGURATION)
NORMAL (OFF)
CENTER
OFFSET
DUAL
MODULATOR REF RS ENCODER
INTERNAL
EXT 5 MHz
EXT 10 MHz
EXT 20 MHz
Modulator high stability reference option only.
ON
OFF
Reed-Solomon option only.
Code Rate
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
G.703
(Mbit/s)
ECL/PECL
(Mbit/s)
8.448, 32.064, 34.368
6.000 to 37.000
All other code rates:
32.064, 34.368
44.736, 51.840
All other code rates:
6.000 to 51.840
MIL-STD-188
(Mbit/s)
All code rates:
6.000 to 13.000
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-3. Configuration Modulator Menu
4–6 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.1.1 Configuration Modulator
TX-X CODE_RATE
TX-IF FREQUENCY
TX-IF OUTPUT
TX POWER LEVEL
DIFF. ENCODER
TX Rate Selection. Under the Utility menu, select one of four
(A, B, C, or D) pre-defined TX code/data rate combinations.
On entry, the current TX rate is displayed on line 1. The data rate is displayed on line 2. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select one of four pre-defined rates (A, B, C, or D).
Note: When the TX rate has been programmed, the TX is automatically turned off to prevent swamping of other channels. To turn on the TX, use the IF Output function.
Programs the modulator TX frequency between 50 and
180 MHz, in 2.5 kHz steps.
On entry, the current TX frequency is displayed. Press [
←
] or
[
→
] to move the flashing cursor, and [
↑
] or [
↓
] to increment or decrement the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: When the TX frequency is changed, the TX is automatically turned off to prevent the possible swamping of other channels. To turn the TX on, use the IF Output function.
Programs the modulator output on or off.
On entry, the current status of the output is displayed. Press
[
←
] or [
→
] to select ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the following modulator output power levels:
•
+5 to -20 dBm, in 0.1 dBm steps (no offset)
•
-5.0 to -30.0 dBm (offset)
An offset can be added through the Utility menu to remove loses or gains in the system.
On entry, the current TX power level is displayed. Press [
↑
] or
[
↓
] to increase or decrease the output power level, in 0.1 dBm steps. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: The actual front panel display may be changed in the power offset utility function. Using this function does not change the actual output power level.
Programs the differential encoder on or off.
On entry, the current status of the differential encoder is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select ON or OFF. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Rev. 4 4–7
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
CARRIER MODE
(Test Mode Configuration
Option)
MODULATOR REF
RS ENCODER
Programs the modem for continuous wave mode. Four modes of operation are available:
•
Normal
•
Center
•
Offset
•
Dual
Normal (OFF) Mode:
The Carrier mode is normally in the OFF position. To execute any of the Carrier continuous wave modes, the user must enter the Carrier mode and select the test mode of choice.
Center Mode:
Generates a carrier at the current modulator frequency. This can be used to measure the output frequency.
Offset Mode:
Generates a single upper sideband suppressed carrier signal.
The upper sideband is at one-quarter of the symbol rate from the carrier. This is used to check the quadrature.
Dual Mode:
Generates a dual side-band suppressed carrier signal.
Sidebands are at one-half of the symbol rate from the carrier.
This is used to check the channel balance and carrier null.
On entry, the Center mode is displayed. To activate this test mode, press [ENTER]. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select the Dual or
Offset modes.
To return to the Configuration menu, press [CLEAR].
Note: When [CLEAR] is pressed, the modem is configured to the state before CW mode was invoked. The TX is automatically turned off to prevent the possible swamping of other channels. To turn the TX on, use the IF Output function.
Optional program for selecting the high stability 5 MHz internal reference and the 5, 10, and 20 MHz external references.
On entry, the Internal mode is displayed. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to select external 5 MHz, external 10 MHz, or external 20 MHz references. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the Reed-Solomon encoder on or off.
On entry, the current status of the Reed-Solomon encoder is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select ON or OFF. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: Programming the Reed-Solomon encoder automatically turns off the RF TX (because of symbol rate changes).
4–8 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
This page is intentionally left blank.
Rev. 4 4–9
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
RX-X CODE_RATE x = FILTER A, B, C, or D
See table below for code rate and data rate range.
IF LOOP BACK
ON
OFF
(TEST MODE CONFIGURATION)
FUNCTION SELECT
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
DEMODULATOR
RX-IF FREQUENCY
70.000 MHz
50 to 180 MHz in 2.5 kHz steps.
BER THRESHOLD
1.0 E-3 to 1.0 E-8
NONE
DIFF. DECODER
ON
OFF
SWEEP RANGE
0 to 120,000 Hz
RF LOOP BACK
ON
OFF
RS DECODER
ON
CORRECTION_OFF
OFF
Reed-Solomon option only.
Code Rate
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
G.703
(Mbit/s)
ECL/PECL
(Mbit/s)
8.448, 32.064, 34.368
6.000 to 37.000
All other code rates:
32.064, 34.368
44.736, 51.840
All other code rates:
6.000 to 51.840
MIL-STD-188
(Mbit/s)
All code rates:
6.000 to 13.000
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-4. Configuration Demodulator Menu
4–10 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.1.2 Configuration Demodulator
RX X CODE_RATE
RX-IF FREQUENCY
DIFF. DECODER
RF LOOP BACK
(Test Mode Configuration
Option)
IF LOOP BACK
(Test Mode Configuration
Option)
RX rate selection. Select one of four (A, B, C, or D) pre-defined
RX decoder/data rate combinations.
On entry, the current RX rate is displayed on line 1. The data rate is displayed on line 2. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select one of four pre-defined rates (A, B, C, or D).
Programs the demodulator RX frequency between 50 and 180
MHz, in 2.5 kHz steps.
On entry, the current RX frequency is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first character. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to move the flashing cursor. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to increment or decrement the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the differential decoder on or off.
On entry, the current status of the differential decoder is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select ON or OFF. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the modem for RF loopback operation. When RF loopback is turned on, the demodulator is programmed to the same frequency as the modulator. When RF loopback is turned off, the demodulator is tuned to the previous frequency.
Refer to Figure 4-17 for a block diagram of RF loopback operation.
Note: RF loopback nullifies IF loopback.
On entry, the current status of the RF loopback is displayed.
Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the modem for IF loopback operation. When IF loopback is turned on, the demodulator input is connected to the modulator output through an internal attenuator. The demodulator is programmed to the same frequency as the modulator. An attenuator within the modem connects the IF out to the IF in. When IF loopback is turned off, the demodulator is tuned to the previous frequency and is reconnected to the IF input. Refer to Figure 4-18 for a block diagram of IF loopback operation.
Note: IF loopback nullifies RF loopback.
On entry, the current status of IF loopback is displayed. Press
[
←
] or [
→
] to select ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Rev. 4 4–11
Operation
BER THRESHOLD
SWEEP RANGE
RS DECODER
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
This function is used to set the BER threshold. If the BER threshold set is exceeded, an RX fault will be indicated by the modem status indicators. BER threshold may be set from 1.0
-3 to 1.0
-8 , or may be disabled by specifying NONE.
On entry, the current setting of the BER threshold is displayed.
Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to select the desired setting. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the overall travel of the sweep width range during acquisition in the directed sweep mode. The sweep width may be set from 0 to 120000 Hz. When set at 120000 Hz, the modem is in the normal acquisition mode.
Upon entry, the current programmed setting is displayed. Press
[
←
] or [
→
] to move the flashing cursor. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to increment or decrement the digit at the flashing cursor. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change. The smaller the range, the faster the modem will lock, provided the RX carrier center frequency is within the RX IF frequency sweep range.
Programs the Reed-Solomon decoder ON,
CORRECTION_OFF, or OFF.
On entry, the current status of the Reed-Solomon decoder is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select one of the following modes:
•
ON
•
CORRECTION_OFF
•
OFF
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
OFF Mode:
The RS decoder is normally disabled (OFF position). To execute any of the Reed-Solomon decoder modes, enter the desired Reed-Solomon decoder and select the desired mode.
Correction OFF Mode:
This mode turns OFF the Reed-Solomon decoder data error correction circuitry. Data flow is then routed through normal data paths without error corrections.
ON Mode:
The ON mode enables the Reed-Solomon decoder to provide data error corrections.
Note: With the Reed-Solomon decoder turned ON (not OFF or
CORRECTION_OFF), the corrected BER will be reported from the outer decoder (Reed-Solomon decoder).
4–12 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
This page is intentionally left blank.
Rev. 4 4–13
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
INTERFACE
TX CLOCK PHASE
NORMAL
INVERT
ECL, PECL, or MIL-STD-188 interface only.
BUFFER CENTER
YES
NO
Only available when buffer installed.
EXT-REF FREQ
1544.000 to 51840.000 kHz
Steps of 8 kHz or at data rate if data rate is over
20000.0 kbit/s.
RX CLOCK PHASE
NORMAL
INVERT
ECL, PECL, or MIL-STD-188 interface only.
BUFFER CLOCK
RX (SATELLITE)
INTERNAL CLOCK
EXT CLOCK
TX TERRESTRIAL
Only available when buffer installed.
BUFFER SIZE
2 to 32 ms (steps of 2 ms)
0 (bypass)
Only available when buffer installed.
B-BAND LOOPBACK
ON
OFF
LOOP TIMING
TX CODING
FORMAT
RX CODING
FORMAT
ON
OFF
ECL, PECL, or MIL-STD-188 interface only.
AMI
B3ZS
HDB3
Only available when G.703
interface installed.
AMI
B3ZS
HDB3
Only available when G.703
interface installed.
INTERFC
LOOPBACK
ON
OFF
SCRAMBLER
ON
OFF
DESCRAMBLER
ON
OFF
RX 2047 PATTERN
ON
OFF
TX DATA FAULT
NONE
AIS
DATA
RX DATA FAULT
NONE
AIS
DATA
TX 2047 PATTERN
ON
OFF
SERVICE CHANNEL
ADJUST
CHANNEL: TX-1 -5 dBm
CHANNEL: TX-2 -5 dBm
CHANNEL: RX-1 -5 dBm
CHANNEL: RX-2 -5 dBm
Level = +10 to -20 dBm.
IDR overhead only.
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-5. Configuration Interface Menu
4–14 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.1.3 Configuration Interface
TX CLOCK PHASE
EXT-REF FREQ
BUFFER CLOCK
Programs the TX clock phase to:
•
Normal
•
Invert
On entry, the current setting for the TX clock phase is displayed.
Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to select Normal or Invert. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available for the ECL, PECL, or
MIL-STD-188 interface.
Programs the external reference clock input frequency between
1544.000 and 51840.000 kHz, in steps of 8 kHz, or at data rate (if data rate is over 20000.0 kbit/s).
On entry, the current setting for the external reference is displayed.
Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to increment or decrement the digit at the flashing cursor. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the interface buffer output clock to one of the following modes:
•
RX
•
Internal
•
External
•
TX
RX (Satellite) Mode:
Sets the buffer output clock to the satellite clock.
Internal Clock Mode:
Sets the buffer output clock to operate from the modem internal clock. This is also the fallback clock.
External Clock Mode:
Sets the clock source to the external supplied buffer clock.
TX Terrestrial Mode:
Sets the buffer output clock to recover timing from the incoming TX data clock.
On entry, the current setting of the buffer clock is displayed. Press
[
←
] or [
→
] to select Satellite, Internal, External Reference, or TX
Terrestrial for the buffer clock. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Notes:
1. This menu is only available when the buffer is installed.
2. The buffer clock source selection must fall within the parameters listed in Chapter 5.
Rev. 4 4–15
Operation
4–16
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
BUFFER SIZE
BUFFER CENTER
RX CLOCK PHASE
B-BAND LOOPBACK
(Test Mode
Configuration Option)
INTERFC LOOPBACK
(Test Mode
Configuration Option)
LOOP TIMING
This configuration function is used to set the size of the buffer.
On entry, the current buffer length is displayed. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to select the desired buffer size. The buffer size will be displayed in ms. The user may choose from 2 to 32 ms, in increments of 2 ms, or 0 (bypass). Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available when the buffer is installed.
This configuration function is used to center the buffer. Press
[ENTER] twice to center the plesiochronous buffer.
Note: This menu is only available when the buffer is installed.
Programs the RX clock phase to:
•
Normal
•
Invert
On entry, the current status of the RX clock is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select Normal or Inverted. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available for the ECL, PECL, or
MIL-STD-188 interface.
Programs the modem for baseband loopback operation.
When baseband loopback is turned on, the data and timing signals are hard-wired (via relays) from the demodulator to the modulator on the modem side of the interface. The DTE baseband signals are also looped back from the TX data and clock to RX data and clock on the customer side of the interface. This is a bi-directional loopback of the baseband data. Refer to Figure 4-19 for a block diagram of baseband loopback operation.
On entry, the current status is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select
ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Notes:
1. If baseband loopback is turned on, the buffer clock will be programmed for RX satellite.
2. When baseband loopback is turned off, the previous buffer clock selection will be programmed back.
Programs the modem for interface loopback operation. When interface loopback is turned on, data is looped back at the modem side of the interface. This is a bi-directional loopback of the data after the baseband data has had the overhead added. Refer to
Figure 4-20 for a block diagram of interface loopback operation.
On entry, the current status is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select
ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the send timing output reference clocking to the satellite clock. Refer to Figures 4-21 and 4-22 for the interface clocking diagram.
On entry, the current status is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select
ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available with the ECL, PECL, or
MIL-STD-188 interface.
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
TX CODING FORMAT
RX CODING FORMAT
SCRAMBLER
DESCRAMBLER
TX DATA FAULT
Programs the TX for the following coding of the baseband data:
•
AMI
• B3ZS
•
HDB3
On entry, the current coding format is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select the desired coding format. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available when the G.703 interface is installed.
Programs the RX for the following coding:
•
AMI
•
B3ZS
•
HDB3
On entry, the current coding format is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select the desired coding format. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available when the G.703 interface is installed.
Programs the scrambler on or off.
On entry, the current status of the scrambler is displayed. Press
[
←
] or [
→
] to select ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the descrambler on or off.
On entry, the current status of the descrambler is displayed. Press
[
←
] or [
→
] to select ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
TX data fault. This configuration function is used to select a TX interface fault monitor of:
•
NONE
•
AIS
•
DATA
None Mode:
The TX interface fault Data/AIS is not activated.
AIS Mode:
Sets TX interface fault Data/AIS to monitor a fault condition of all 1s from customer data input to the modem.
Data Fault Mode:
Sets TX interface fault Data/AIS to monitor a fault condition of all 1s or all 0s. This is referred to as a data-stable condition, which means that the data is not transitioning.
On entry, the current TX data fault that is being monitored is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select Data, AIS, or None. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Rev. 4 4–17
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
RX DATA FAULT
TX 2047 PATTERN
(Test Mode
Configuration Option)
RX 2047 PATTERN
(Test Mode
Configuration Option)
SERVICE CHANNEL
RX data fault. This configuration function is used to select an RX interface fault monitor of:
•
NONE
•
AIS
•
DATA
The data monitored for RX data is coming from the satellite. Refer to TX data fault for a description of the function choices.
On entry, the current RX data fault that is being monitored is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select Data, AIS, or None. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the TX to insert a 2047 pattern in lieu of the normal TX data.
On entry, the current status is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select
ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the modem to RX a 2047 pattern as the normal RX data, and allows the BER monitor to work on that 2047 pattern.
On entry, the current status is displayed. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to select
ON or OFF. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
This configuration function is used to set service channel audio levels between +10.0 and -20.0 dBm.
On entry, press [
←
] or [
→
] to select the desired service channel:
•
TX-1
•
TX-2
• RX-1
•
RX-2
To adjust the service channel level (+10.0 to -20.0 dBm), press
[ENTER]. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to adjust the service channel. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available when IDR has been selected for
TX or RX overhead in the Interface Utility menu.
4–18 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
CONFIGURATION #X x = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
FUNCTION SELECT
CONFIGURATION
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONFIGURATION
SAVE
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-6. Configuration Save Menu
4.2.1.4 Configuration Save
This feature allows the user to program configuration parameters into memory on the
M&C. There are five memory locations that may be used to store specific configuration setups that are used frequently. This feature speeds up the configuration process and allows faster configuration changes.
After setting all configuration parameters to the desired settings, enter the Configuration
Save menu (Figure 4-6) and select memory location 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. Press [ENTER] to execute the save.
Rev. 4 4–19
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
CONFIGURATION #X x = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
FUNCTION SELECT
CONFIGURATION
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONFIGURATION
RECALL
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-7. Configuration Recall Menu
4.2.1.5 Configuration Recall
Once a configuration setup has been saved, it may be recalled by entering Configuration
Recall. On entry, select the appropriate memory location (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5) by pressing [ ← ] or [ → ]. Press [ENTER] to execute the Recall. The modem will now be reconfigured to the setting that was in that memory location.
4–20 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
MONITOR
RAW BER
2.4 E-3
CORRECTED BER
4.0 E-3
EB/N0
CURRENT RAW BER
Low limit: based on performance.
High Limit: based on data/code rate.
NO DATA (if carrier not locked).
CURRENT CORRECTED BER
Low limit: based on performance.
High limit: 1.0 E-12.
NO DATA (if carrier not locked).
CURRENT Eb/N0
Low limit: based on data rate.
High limit: 16.0 dB.
NO DATA (if carrier not locked).
RECEIVE SIGNAL
-45 dBm
CURRENT RECEIVE
LEVEL
(-25 to -50 dBm)
SWEEP FREQUENCY
CURRENT SWEEP
FREQUENCY
(-60,000 to +60,000 Hz).
BUFFER FILL
CURRENT BUFFER FILL STATUS
(1 to 99%) or
NO DATA (if carrier not locked).
Only available when buffer installed.
FRAME ERRORS
CURRENT FRAME/2047 BER
Low limit: based on performance,
High limit: based on data/code rate, or
NO DATA (if carrier not locked), or
SAMPLING (if collecting data).
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-8. Monitor Menu
Rev. 4 4–21
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
4.2.2 Monitor
When the Monitor level is entered, press [ ← ] or [ → ] to select the desired monitor function. Each monitor function is displayed in real time as long as it is selected.
RAW BER
CORRECTED BER
E b
/N
0
RX SIGNAL
SWEEP FREQUENCY
BUFFER FILL
FRAME ERRORS
Displays the current BER or No Data (if carrier is not locked).
Range: <m.m
-e to >m.m
-e .
Note: Low limit based on performance. High limit based on data/code rate.
Displays the current corrected BER or No Data (if carrier is not locked).
Range: <m.m
-e to >m.m
-e .
Note: Low limit based on performance. High limit is 1.0
-12 .
Displays the current E b
/N
0
or No Data (if carrier is not locked).
Range: <mm.m to >mm.m.
Note: Low limit based on performance. High limit is 16.0 dB.
Displays the current RX signal level.
Range: -mm dBm (-25 to -50 dBm).
Displays the current sweep frequency.
Range: -60,000 to +60,000 Hz.
Displays the current plesiochronous buffer fill status percent, or No
Data (if carrier not locked).
Range: nn% (1% to 99%).
Note: This menu is only available when buffer installed.
Displays the following information:
•
Current framing pattern BER.
•
“No Data” (if carrier is not locked).
•
“Sampling” if collecting data.
Range: <mm.m
-e to >mm.m
-e .
Note: Low limit based on performance. High limit based on data/code rate.
4–22 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
MODULATOR
IF SYNTHESIZER
DATA CLOCK ACT
DATA CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
AGC LEVEL
INTERNAL SCT SYN
EXT REF ACT
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
See notes.
COMMON
BATTERY/CLOCK
-12 VOLT SUPPLY
+12 VOLT SUPPLY
+5 VOLT SUPPLY
-5 VOLT SUPPLY
CONTROLLER
INTERFACE MODULE
See notes.
FUNCTION SELECT
FAULTS/ALARMS
DEMODULATOR
CARRIER DETECT
IF SYNTHESIZER
RX CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
DESCRAMBLER
BER THRESHOLD
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
See notes.
BACKWARD ALARMS
BW ALARM RX #4
BW ALARM RX #3
BW ALARM RX #2
BW ALARM RX #1
BW ALARM TX #4
BW ALARM TX #3
BW ALARM TX #2
BW ALARM TX #1
See notes.
IDR overhead only.
TX INTERFACE
TX DATA/AIS
TX CLK PLL
TX CLK ACTIVITY
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
See notes.
RX INTERFACE
BUFFER UNDERFLOW
BUFFER OVERFLOW
RX DATA/AIS
FRAME BER
BUFFER CLK PLL
BUFFER CLK ACT
DEMUX LOCK
RX 2047 LOCK
BUFFER FULL
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
See notes.
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
Notes:
1. A "-" indicates that no fault or alarm exists.
2. A "+" indicates that a fault exists, and will
cause switching in a redundant system.
3. A reversed contrast "+" indicates an active
alarm.
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-9. Faults/Alarms Menu
Operation
Rev. 4 4–23
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
4.2.3 Faults/Alarms
The Faults/Alarms level is accessible from the Function Select menu. Faults/Alarms are similar to Monitor functions, as they display the current fault status of the group being displayed. Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to move between the following Fault/Alarm groups:
•
Modulator
•
Demodulator
•
TX Interface
•
RX Interface
•
Common
•
Backward Alarms (IDR overhead only)
The current Faults/Alarms status is displayed on line 2 of the display in real time.
For each parameter monitored, fault status is displayed as follows:
•
“-” indicates that no fault or alarm exists.
•
“+” indicates that a fault exists, and will cause switching in a redundant system.
•
A reversed-contrast “+” indicates an alarm is active. Alarms do not cause switching to occur.
To display labels for individual faults or alarms, press [ENTER]. Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to move the flashing cursor to identify the fault or alarm. The label for that Fault/Alarm is then displayed on line 1.
Press [CLEAR] to exit this level of operation and return to the previous level.
The following sections outline the faults and alarms monitored and displayed in each group. Refer to the fault isolation section in Chapter 6 for more details on the causes of each fault.
4–24 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.3.1 Modulator Faults
IF SYNTHESIZER
DATA CLOCK ACT
DATA CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
AGC LEVEL
INTERNAL SCT SYN
EXT REF ACT
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
Modulator IF synthesizer fault.
TX data clock activity alarm.
Indicates that data clock activity was not detected.
TX clock synthesizer fault.
Indicates the internal VCO has not locked to the incoming data clock.
I channel data activity fault.
Q channel data activity fault.
TX IF AGC level fault.
Internal TX data clock synthesizer fault.
Modulator fault.
This is only used with the External Reference High Stability option.
Indicates modulator does not have an external reference.
Modulator module fault.
Typically indicates that the modulator module is missing or will not program.
Modulator programming fault.
Modulator configuration fault.
Indicates the modulator cannot execute a programmed configuration parameter.
Rev. 4 4–25
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
4.2.3.2 Demodulator Faults
CARRIER DETECT
IF SYNTHESIZER
RX CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
DESCRAMBLER
BER THRESHOLD
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
Carrier detect fault.
Indicates the decoder is not locked.
Demodulator IF synthesizer fault.
Indicates the IF synthesizer is not locked.
RX data clock synthesizer fault.
Indicates a loss of lock on the reference of the demodulator clock recovery oscillator.
I channel activity fault.
Indicates a loss of activity in the I channel of the quadrature demodulator.
Q channel activity fault.
Indicates a loss of activity in the Q channel of the quadrature demodulator.
Descrambler activity alarm.
Indicates a loss of activity in the descrambler.
BER threshold set in the Configuration Demod menu.
Demodulator/decoder module fault.
Typically indicates that the Demod/decoder module is missing or will not program.
Demodulator programming fault.
Demodulator configuration fault.
Indicates the demodulator cannot execute a programmed configuration parameter.
4–26 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.3.3 TX Interface Faults
TX DATA/AIS
TX CLOCK PLL
TX CLOCK ACTIVITY
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
Data or AIS. When data fault is selected in the Configuration
Interface menu, the fault indicates a data-stable condition. This indicates the data is all 1s or all 0s (i.e., the data is not transitioning).
When AIS is selected, the alarm indicates the data is all 1s from customer data input to the modem. When None is selected in the
Configuration Interface menu, the TX Data/AIS Fault/Alarm is not activated.
Note: AIS is an alarm, not a switching fault.
TX phase-locked loop fault. Indicates the TX PLL is not locked.
Activity detector alarm interface TX clock. The interface will fall back to the internal clock when this alarm is active.
TX Interface programming fault.
TX Interface configuration fault. Indicates the TX interface cannot execute a programmed configuration parameter.
Rev. 4 4–27
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.3.4 RX Interface Faults
BUFFER UNDERFLOW Buffer underflow alarm. Indicates that a buffer underflow has occurred.
BUFFER OVERFLOW Buffer overflow alarm. Indicates that a buffer overflow has occurred.
RX DATA/AIS Data or AIS. When data fault is selected in the Configuration
Interface menu, the fault indicates a data-stable condition. This indicates the data coming from the satellite is all 1s or all 0s (i.e., the data is not transitioning). When AIS is selected, the Alarm indicates the data is all 1s from the satellite. When None is selected in the Configuration Interface menu, the RX Data/AIS
Fault/Alarm is not activated.
FRAME BER
BUFFER CLK PLL
BUFFER CLK ACT
DEMUX LOCK
RX 2047 LOCK
Note: AIS is an alarm, not a switching fault.
Frame BER fault. Indicates that the frame BER exceeds 1 -3 .
Buffer clock phase-locked loop fault. Indicates the buffer clock PLL is not locked.
Activity detector alarm of the selected interface RX clock. The interface will fall back to the satellite clock when this fault is active.
DEMUX lock fault. Indicates that the DEMUX is not locked.
RX 2047 lock alarm. Indicates the RX 2047 data pattern is not locked.
BUFFER FULL
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
Note: This alarm is only active when RX 2047 is on.
Buffer full alarm.
Indicates the buffer is less than 10% or greater than 90% full.
RX Interface programming fault.
TX Interface configuration fault.
Indicates the TX interface cannot execute a programmed configuration parameter.
Rev.4
4–29
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
4.2.3.5 Common Equipment Faults
BATTERY/CLOCK
-12V SUPPLY
+12V SUPPLY
+5V SUPPLY
-5V SUPPLY
CONTROLLER
INTERFACE MODULE
Battery or clock fault
-12V power supply fault
+12V power supply fault
+5V power supply fault
-5V power supply fault
Controller fault: typically indicates the controller has gone through a power on-off cycle
Interface module fault: typically indicates that the interface module is missing or will not program.
4.2.3.6 Backward Alarms
BW Alarm RX #4
BW Alarm RX #3
BW Alarm RX #2
BW Alarm RX #1
BW Alarm TX #4
BW Alarm TX #3
BW Alarm TX #2
BW Alarm TX #1
RX backward alarm # 4 indicator
RX backward alarm # 3 indicator
RX backward alarm # 2 indicator
RX backward alarm # 1 indicator
TX backward alarm # 4 indicator
TX backward alarm # 3 indicator
TX backward alarm # 2 indicator
TX backward alarm # 1 indicator
Note: IDR overhead only.
4–30 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
This page is intentionally left blank.
Rev.4
4–31
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
MODULATOR X
HH:MM:SS/MM-DD-YY
(FAULT LABEL)
IF SYNTHESIZER
DATA CLOCK ACT
DATA CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
AGC
INTERNAL SCT SYN
EXT REF ACT
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
See notes.
FUNCTION SELECT
STORED
FLTS/ALMS
DEMODULATOR X
HH:MM:SS/MM-DD-YY
(FAULT LABEL)
CARRIER DETECT
IF SYNTHESIZER
RX CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
DESCRAMBLER
BER THRESHOLD
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
See notes.
COMMON X
HH:MM:SS/MM-DD-YY
(FAULT LABEL)
BATTERY/CLOCK
-12 VOLT SUPPLY
+12 VOLT SUPPLY
+5 VOLT SUPPLY
-5 VOLT SUPPLY
CONTROLLER
INTERFACE MODULE
See notes.
BACKWARD ALARMS
X
HH:MM:SS/MM-DD-YY
(FAULT LABEL)
BW ALARM RX #4
BW ALARM RX #3
BW ALARM RX #2
BW ALARM RX #1
BW ALARM TX #4
BW ALARM TX #3
BW ALARM TX #2
BW ALARM TX #1
See notes.
IDR overhead only.
TX INTERFACE X
HH:MM:SS/MM-DD-YY
(FAULT LABEL)
TX DATA/AIS
TX CLK PLL
TX CLK ACTIVITY
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
See notes.
RX INTERFACE X
HH:MM:SS/MM-DD-YY
(FAULT LABEL)
BUFFER UNDERFLOW
BUFFER OVERFLOW
RX DATA/AIS
FRAME BER
BUFFER CLK PLL
BUFFER CLK ACT
DEMUX LOCK
RX 2047 LOCK
BUFFER FULL
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
See notes.
UNAVAL SECONDS X CLEAR??
HH:MM:SS/MM-DD-YY
See notes.
Reed-Solomon only.
Press [ENTER] to clear stored faults.
Notes:
1. X = 0 to 9
2. Stored time/date will alternate.
HH:MM:SS, MM-DD-YY, or no fault.
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-10. Stored Faults/Alarms Menu
4–32 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.4 Stored Faults/Alarms
The modem stores the first 10 (Flt0 through Flt9) occurrences of fault status changes in each of the following major fault categories:
•
Modulator
•
Demodulator
•
TX Interface
•
RX Interface
•
Common
•
Backward Alarms (IDR overhead only)
•
Unaval Seconds (Reed-Solomon only)
Each fault status change is stored with the time and date of the occurrence (i.e., when a fault occurs and clears). Stored faults may be viewed by entering the Stored Faults level from the Select menu.
All stored faults may be cleared by executing the Clear Stored Faults?? command from the Stored Faults level.
Stored faults are not maintained through a controller power-on reset cycle. However, the last known time is maintained in non-volatile RAM. On power-up, a common equipment fault is logged (Flt0) with that time and date. Also on power-up, an additional common equipment fault is logged (Flt1) to indicate the power-up time and date. The power-down and power-up times are logged as common equipment fault 0 and common equipment fault 1, respectively.
On entering the Stored Faults level, press [ ← ] or [ → ] to move between the six fault groups and the Clear Stored Faults?? selections. The time and date of the first stored fault status
(Flt0) for the selected group will be displayed alternately on line 2 of the display. Press
[ ↑ ] or [ ↓ ] to cycle through the selected group’s stored fault status (Flt0 through Flt9). To display the fault status associated with the displayed time and date, press [ENTER]. The user can now press [ ← ] or [ → ] to move the flashing cursor to identify the fault.
To clear the stored faults currently logged, press [ENTER] when the “Clear Stored
Faults/Yes?” selection is displayed.
Note: Faults are stored in time sequence, with the oldest fault status change stored in
Flt0, and the most recent in Flt9. Only the first 10 fault status changes are stored. All stored faults which have not been used indicate “No Fault” on the display.
Rev.4
4–33
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
This page is intentionally left blank.
4–34 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.5 Utility
The Function Select Utility menu is divided into the following five categories:
•
Modulator
•
Demodulator
•
Interface
•
System
•
Factory Setup
Refer to Figures 4-11 through 4-16 for different menu categories. The menu information includes:
•
Terrestrial interface types
•
Time/date
•
Firmware information
•
Test mode status
•
Overhead type
•
Revision emulation
Note: Changes in the Utility menu may cause changes in other front panel menus.
A lamp test function is provided for testing front panel optical indicators.
Note: The Factory Setup Utility menu is for EFData service personnel only. Entering this menu may cause the modem to operate incorrectly.
After entering the Utility functions level, press [ ← ] or [ → ] to select the desired Utility menu and press [ENTER]. Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to view the utility function of interest.
Rev.4
4–35
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
UTILITY
UTILITY
MODULATOR
ASSIGN TRANSMIT
FILTERS
MOD SPECTRUM MOD OPTION
MOD POWER
OFFSET
STATUS ONLY
See table below for code rate and data rate range.
TXA QPSK 3/4
32368.000 kbit/s
TXB QPSK 3/4 +RS
34368.000 kbit/s
Appended "+RS" indicates
Reed-Solomon calibrated.
TXC QPSK 3/4
44736.000 kbit/s
TXD QPSK 3/4
51840.000 kbit/s
NORMAL
INVERT
STATUS ONLY
8PSK and 16QAM
HIGH STABILITY.
Code Rate G.703
(Mbit/s)
ECL/PECL
(Mbit/s)
8.448, 32.064, 34.368
6.000 to 37.000
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
All other code rates:
32.064, 34.368
44.736, 51.840
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8 or N/A (not assigned)
All other code rates:
6.000 to 51.840
MIL-STD-188
(Mbit/s)
All code rates:
6.000 to 13.000
-40.0 to +40.0 dB (USER)
POWER OFFSET
Anything except 0.0 dB will cause "(ADJ)" to be displayed in the TX
POWER LEVEL screen.
MOD POWER FIXED
OFFSET
TX MODULE FW TX FPGA FIRMWARE FILTER FIRMWARE
STATUS ONLY
+20.0 TO -20.0 dBm
Displays the (FIXED) modulator power offset from nominal
(HIGH PWR OPTION).
XXX.YYY.ZZZ
XXX.YYY.ZZZ = Firmware number
MM/DD/YY = Month/Day/Year
FW/NNNNNN-DDR
FW/NNNNNN-DDR = Firmware number
MM/DD/YY = Month/Day/Year
FW/NNNNNN-DDR
FW/NNNNNN-DDR = Firmware number
MM/DD/YY = Month/Day/Year
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-11. Utility Modulator Menu
4–36 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.5.1 Utility Modulator
ASSIGN TX FILTERS
MOD SPECTRUM
MOD OPTION
MOD POWER OFFSET
TX filter display utility. Used to view filter rate assignments.
The modulator has up to four symbol rate filters. Filters are designated as A, B, C, and D.
To view the assignments, press [ENTER]. TXA appears on line 1 of the display, which indicates TX filter A. The code rate follows TXA on line 1. Line 2 displays the data rate assigned to preset A. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to view the assignments for B, C, and D (TXB, TXC, and TXD).
Notes:
1. These assignments are used for the selection of TX rate in the Configuration Functions menu.
2. If the filter is optimized for Reed-Solomon, “+RS” will be appended to the code rate.
3. Refer to the table in Figure 4-11 for code rates and data rate ranges.
Programmable vector rotation. Allows the operator to select
Normal or Inverted for spectrum reversal of the I and Q baseband channels.
This program displays the following modulator options:
•
8PSK and 16QAM
•
Stability
Note: This menu is status only.
Modulator power adjust offset. Allows the operator to offset the modulator output power readout in the Configuration menu. This feature does not actually change the modulator power level. The function is to change the actual reading to display an offset value in the monitor. The modulator power offset can be set from -40.0 to +40.0 dB, in 0.1 dB steps.
Note: Anything except 0.0 dB will cause “ADJ” to be displayed in the TX power level screen.
MOD POWER FIXED OFFSET Modulator power fixed (status only). Indicates the power of a modulator that has been provided with extra gain (+20.0
to -20.0 dBm).
TX MODULE FIRMWARE
TX FPGA FIRMWARE
FILTER FIRMWARE
Note: This screen displays the fixed modulator power offset for nominal high power options. (+10 dBm is standard.)
Displays the TX module firmware version installed in TX module. The display includes the month, day, and year.
Displays the firmware installed in the TX field programmable gate array. The display includes the month, day, and year.
Displays modulator pre-filter information. The display includes the month, day, and year.
Rev.4
4–37
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
UTILITY
UTILITY
DEMODULATOR
ASSIGN RECEIVE
FILTERS
STATUS ONLY
See table below for code rate and data rate range.
RXA QPSK 3/4
32368.000 kbit/s
RXB QPSK 3/4 +RS
34368.000 kbit/s
Appended "+RS" indicates
Reed-Solomon calibrated.
RXC QPSK 3/4
44736.000 kbit/s
RXD QPSK 3/4
51840.000 kbit/s
DEMOD SPECTRUM
NORMAL
INVERT
DEMOD OPTION
STATUS ONLY
8PSK and 16QAM
Code Rate G.703
(Mbit/s)
ECL/PECL
(Mbit/s)
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
16QAM 3/4
8.448, 32.064, 34.368
6.000 to 37.000
All other code rates:
32.064, 34.368
44.736, 51.840
16QAM 7/8 or N/A (not assigned)
All other code rates:
6.000 to 51.840
MIL-STD-188
(Mbit/s)
All code rates:
6.000 to 13.000
RX MODULE FW
XXX.YYY.ZZZ
XXX.YYY.ZZZ = Firmware number
MM/DD/YY = Month/Day/Year
RX FPGA FIRMWARE
FW/NNNNNN-DDR
FW/NNNNNN-DDR = Firmware number
MM/DD/YY = Month/Day/Year
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-12. Utility Demodulator Menu
4–38 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.5.2 Utility Demodulator
ASSIGN RX FILTERS
DEMOD SPECTRUM
DEMOD OPTION
RX MODULE FIRMWARE
RX FPGA FIRMWARE
RX filter display utility. Used to view filter rate assignments.
The modulator has up to four symbol rate filters. Filters are designated as A, B, C, and D.
To view the assignments, press [ENTER]. RXA will be on line 1 of the display, which indicates TX filter A. Following
RXA on line 1 will be the code rate (1/2, 3/4, or 7/8). On line 2 will be the data rate assigned to preset A. Press [
←
] or [
→
] to view the assignments for B, C, and D (RXB, RXC, and RXD).
Notes:
1. These assignments are used for the selection of RX rate in the Configuration Functions menu.
2. If the filter is optimized for Reed-Solomon, “+RS” will be appended to the code rate.
3. Refer to the table in Figure 4-12 for code rates and data rate ranges.
Programmable vector rotation. Allows the operator to select
Normal or Inverted for spectrum reversal of the I and Q baseband channels.
This program displays the 8PSK and 16QAM option.
Note: This menu is status only.
Displays the RX module firmware version installed in RX module. The display includes the month, day, and year.
Displays the firmware installed in the RX field programmable gate array. The display includes the month, day, and year.
Rev.4
4–39
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
TX OVERHEAD TYPE
NONE
IDR
ESC option only.
FUNCTION SELECT
UTILITY
RX OVERHEAD TYPE
NONE
IDR
ESC option only.
UTILITY
INTERFACE
TERRESTRIAL INTF
STATUS ONLY
G.703
ECL
PECL
MIL-STD-188-144
INTERFACE
BUILD
TYPE: x
Displays the interface module type (1, 2, or 3). This menu is a status only window reporting the following types of modem operation:
Type 1 Base
Type 2 Doppler Buffer
Type 3 Doppler Buffer and
ESC
INTERFACE OPTION
STATUS ONLY
BUFFER
ESC
RS (EFD)
RS (DVB)
ESC-64K
TX INTERFACE ESC
64K DATA OR 2-32K AUDIO
Status only.
ESC-64K interface only.
TX DATA PHASE
NORMAL
INVERT
ECL, PECL, or MIL-STD-188 interface only.
RX DATA PHASE
NORMAL
INVERT
ECL, PECL, or MIL-STD-188 interface only.
RX INTERFACE ESC
64K DATA OR 2-32K AUDIO
Status only.
ESC-64K interface only.
SCRAMBLER TYPE
IDR
V.35
EFD
DESCRAMBLER TYPE
IDR
V.35
EFD
A
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-13. Utility Interface Menu
4–40 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A
Operation
FRAMING STRUCTURE
6312 Framing Structure:
NONE
G.704
G.743
G.747
8448 Framing Structure:
NONE
G.704
G.742
G.745
32064 Framing Structure:
NONE
G.752
34368 Framing Structure:
NONE
G.751
G.753
44736 Framing Structure:
NONE
G.752
51840 Framing Structure:
NONE
STS-1
IDR BACKWARD
ALARM CONTROL
BW Alarm RX #x
ON
OFF
BW Alarm TX #x
ON
OFF x = 1 to 4
IDR overhead only.
INTERFACE MODULE
FW
FW/NNNNNN-DDR = Firmware number
MM/DD/YY = Month/Day/Year
INTERFACE FPGA FW
FW/NNNNNN-DDR = Firmware number
MM/DD/YY = Month/Day/Year
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-
DEPENDENT
Parameter
Information
Figure 4-13. Utility Interface Menu Continued
Rev.4
4–41
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
4.2.5.3 Utility Interface
TX OVERHEAD TYPE
RX OVERHEAD TYPE
TERRESTRIAL INTF
INTERFACE BUILD
INTERFACE OPTION
TX INTERFACE ESC
RX INTERFACE ESC
TX DATA PHASE
Select IDR or None for TX overhead type.
Note: The ESC option must be installed.
Select IDR or None for RX overhead type.
Note: The ESC option must be installed.
Displays the following interface type:
•
G.703
•
ECL
•
PECL
•
MIL-STD-188
Displays the interface module type (1, 2, or 3). This menu is a status-only window reporting the following four types of modem operation:
•
Type Base
•
Type 2 Doppler Buffer
• Type 3 Doppler Buffer and ESC
This menu is a status-only window reporting the interface options. The interface module options displayed are:
•
Buffer
•
ESC
•
RS
•
RS
•
ESC-64K
This menu is a status-only window reporting the status of the
ESC interface. The TX options displayed are:
•
64K
•
2-32K
This menu is a status-only window reporting the status of the
ESC interface. The RX options displayed are:
• 64K
•
2-32K
Allows the user to invert TX data coming from the terrestrial network.
On entry, press [ ← ] or [ → ] to select Normal or Inverted. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available for the ECL, PECL, or
MIL-STD-188 interface.
4–42 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
RX DATA PHASE
SCRAMBLER TYPE
DESCRAMBLER TYPE
FRAMING STRUCTURE
IDR BACKWARD ALARM
CONTROL
INTERFACE MODULE
FIRMWARE
INTERFACE FPGA
FIRMWARE
Allows the user to invert RX data going to the terrestrial network.
On entry, press [ ← ] or [ → ] to select Normal or Inverted. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: This menu is only available for the ECL, PECL, or
MIL-STD-188 interface.
Programs the scrambler for the following types of operation:
• IDR (per IESS-308)
•
V.35 (per CCITT V.35)
•
EFD (SDM-450 compatible)
On entry, the current status of the scrambler is displayed.
Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to select the type. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs the descrambler for the following types of operation:
• IDR (per IESS-308)
•
V.35 (per CCITT V.35)
•
EFD (SDM-450 compatible)
On entry, the current status of the descrambler is displayed.
Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to select the type. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Displays the currently selected framing type and structure of the data.
Framing Type Framing Structure
6312
8448
32064
34368
NONE, G.704, G.743, or G.747
NONE, G.704, G.742, or G.745
NONE or G.752
NONE, G.751, or G.753
44736
51840
NONE or G.752
NONE or STS-1
Controls IDR monitor and alarm functions when not using a communications link. Allows the user to select ON or OFF for the RX and TX alarms.
Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to select BW alarm RX or TX numbers
1 through 4. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Displays the current version of the interface module firmware.
The display includes the month, day, and year.
Displays the current firmware installed in the interface field programmable gate array. The display includes the month, day, and year.
Rev.4
4–43
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
4–44
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
UTILITY
UTILITY
SYSTEM
TIME: HH:MM:SS AM/PM
DATE: MM/DD/YY
Current time and date.
TEST MODE
STATUS
RF OUTPUT
REED-SOLOMON
RX 2047 PATTERN
TX 2047 PATTERN
INTRFC LOOP BACK
B-BAND LOOP BACK
RF LOOP BACK
IF LOOP BACK
CARRIER MODE
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
LEVEL: 0 to 100
REMOTE BAUD RATE
X PARITY
X =
110 1200
150 2400
300 4800
600 9600
19200
X = bps
Parity: even, odd, or none.
REMOTE ADDRESS
1 to 255
0 is reserved for global address.
OPERATION MODE
DUPLEX
TRANSMIT ONLY
RECEIVE ONLY
LAMP TEST???
MASTER RESET
EXT AGC: MIN PWR
M&C MODULE FW
Press [ENTER] to turn on all the front panel indicators for three seconds.
HARD/SOFT
Initiating a hard reset will result in the modem being configured to the default settings in ROM. Initiating a soft reset will reset the modem hardware, but will save the current configuration settings.
Note: The following parameters do not revert to default settings after a hard reset:
· Address
· Parity
· Baud Rate
· Ext AGC: Min Pwr
· Ext AGC: Max Pwr
· Display Contrast
FW/NNNNNN-DDR
MM/DD/YY
FW/NNNNNN-DDR =
Firmware number
MM/DD/YY = Month/Day/
Year
EXT AGC: MAX
PWR
0.0 to 10.0V
0.0 to 10.0V
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-
DEPENDENT
Parameter
Information
Figure 4-14. Utility System Menu
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.5.4 Utility System
TIME/DATE
REMOTE/BAUD RATE/PARITY
REMOTE ADDRESS
OPERATION MODE
Displays current time and date.
To set the modem time and/or date, press [ENTER].
Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to position the flashing cursor over the parameter to be changed. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to change the parameter to the desired value. Once the parameters are displayed as desired, press [ENTER] to execute the change.
The current parity and baud rate of the modem are displayed. The parity can be set to:
•
Even
•
Odd
•
None
The baud rate can be set from 110 to 19200 bit/s.
To set the modem baud rate and/or parity, press
[ENTER]. Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to position the flashing cursor over the parameter to be changed. Press [ ↑ ] or [ ↓ ] to change the parameter to the desired value. Once the parameters are displayed as desired, press [ENTER] to execute the changes.
The current modem address is displayed (1 to 255).
To set the remote address, press [ENTER]. Press [ ↑ ] or
[
↓
] to change the parameter to the desired value. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Operation mode. Programs the modem operation for the following operation:
•
Duplex
•
TX-only
•
RX-only
On entry, the flashing cursor is displayed. Press [
←
] or
[
→
] to select TX only, RX-only, or Duplex. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: When TX-only or RX-only is selected, the appropriate faults are masked from the Faults and Stored
Faults menu.
Rev.4
4–45
Operation
TEST MODE STATUS
LAMP TEST ??
MASTER RESET
M&C MODULE FW
DISPLAY CONTRAST
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Test mode status indicator. The following modem test points are listed in this window and will display a “+” when a test mode is active:
•
RF
•
Reed-Solomon
• RX 2047 Pattern
•
TX 2047 Pattern
•
Loopback
•
B-Band
•
RF
•
IF
•
Carrier
To view the test modes, press [ENTER]. Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to move through the list of test modes.
Lamp test function to test all the front panel indicators.
Press [ENTER] to turn on all of the front panel indicators for three seconds.
Master reset function.
•
HARD resets the switch to the defaults in ROM.
•
SOFT resets the switch to stored configuration.
CAUTION
Initiating a hard reset will result in the modem being configured to the default settings in ROM. Initiating a soft reset will reset the modem hardware, but will save the current configuration settings.
Note: The following parameters do not revert to default settings after a hard reset:
•
Address
•
Parity
•
Rate
•
Ext AGC: Min Pwr
•
Ext AGC: Max Pwr
•
Contrast
Press [ENTER] to begin. Press [ ← ] or [ → ] to select
HARD or SOFT. Press [ENTER], then press [
→
] five times so the cursor is on YES. Press [ENTER] twice to reset.
Displays the M&C module firmware version. The display includes the month, day, and year.
Sets the contrast setting of the front panel menu from 0 to 100%.
Press [ENTER] to change the contrast of the front panel display. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to increment or decrement the number at the flashing cursor from
0 to 100. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
4–46 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
EXT AGC: MAX PWR
EXT AGC: MIN PWR
Operation
Sets the AGC voltage for an RX signal level of -25 dBm.
The voltage range is 0.0 to 10.0V, in 0.5V steps.
On entry, the current external AGC voltage level is displayed. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to change the AGC voltage level in 0.5V steps. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: For any RX signal level between -25 and -50 dBm, the software will interpolate the required AGC voltage.
Sets the AGC voltage for an RX signal level of -50 dBm.
The voltage range is 0.0 to 10.0V, in 0.5V steps.
On entry, the current external AGC voltage level is displayed. Press [
↑
] or [
↓
] to change the AGC voltage level in 0.5V steps. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: For any RX signal level between -25 and -50 dBm, the software will interpolate the required AGC voltage.
Rev.4
4–47
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
UTILITY
UTILITY
MODEM TYPE
MODEM TYPE
INTELSAT
DBS
N5500 COMPATIBLE
REV EMULATION
CURRENT_VERSION or
FUNCTIONAL X
Where X = 1
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
Figure 4-15. Utility Modem Type Menu
4–48 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.2.5.5 Utility Modem Type
MODEM TYPE
REV EMULATION
Programs the modem to operate as one of the following types:
•
INTELSAT
•
DBS
•
N5500
On entry, the flashing cursor is displayed. Press [ ← ] or
[
→
] to select INTELSAT, DVB, or N5500. Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Programs an emulation mode of a previous functional revision. This allows the user to select the
CURRENT_VERSION or Functional version (X).
Note: The Utility menu numbers will increase with each software version change (current version is 6.1.1). Refer to Chapter 3 for a description of the software configuration.
On entry, the CURRENT_VERSION is displayed. Press
[ ← ] or [ → ] to select the functional versions. Press
[ENTER] to execute the change.
Notes:
1. Programming a current version (default) allows all features and options (if installed) to operate normally.
2. Programming a function eliminates anything that affects the later version. Only functional changes are affected by the revision emulation feature.
3. A correction change (e.g., VER 1.1.1) remains fixed in accordance with the latest version. Since the revision emulation default is the current version, the user must program the functional version at the start of each operation.
4. The revision emulation feature does not affect some user interface changes for the direct operation of the modem (configuration save/recall, test mode screen in the Utility/System, all factory setup modes, etc.).
Rev.4
4–49
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
SDM-9000 "TYPE"
VER: 6.1.1
FUNCTION SELECT
UTILITY
UTILITY
FACTORY SET_UP
Key:
ACCESS TO
SUBMENU
CONDITIONAL OR
OPTION-DEPENDENT
Parameter Information
TX COURSE POWER TABLE ADJUST
TX FINE POWER TABLE ADJUST
TX FIXED POWER OFFSET
RX SIGNAL LEVEL CALIBRATION
MOD FLTS ENABLE
DEMOD FLTS ENABLE
TX INT FLTS ENABLE
RX INT FLTS ENABLE
TX MODULE RESET
RX MODULE RESET
INT MODULE RESET
ASSIGN TRANSMIT FILTERS
ASSIGN RECEIVE FILTERS
Figure 4-16. Utility Factory Setup Menu
4.2.5.6 Utility Factory Setup
CAUTION
This configuration is used for factory alignment. Factory setup should not be changed by unauthorized persons. To do so may cause modem failure.
4–50 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
Figure 4-17. RF Loopback
Rev.4
Figure 4-18. IF Loopback
4–51
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
TX DATA/CLOCK
BASEBAND
LOOPBACK
RELAYS
TERRESTRIAL
DATA/CLOCK
TX DATA
RX DATA
INTERFACE
MODULE
MODULATOR
DATA MODULATOR
MODULE
TX IF OUT
DEMODULATOR
DATA
DEMODULATOR
MODULE
RX IF IN
RX DATA/CLOCK
Baseband loopback provides loopback at the terrestrial interface. The near end equipment loops back through the baseband loopback relays. The far end equipment loops through the demodulator, interface, and the modulator.
Figure 4-19. Baseband Loopback
4–52
TX DATA/CLOCK
TERRESTRIAL
DATA/CLOCK
INTERFACE
MODULE
TX DATA
INTERFACE
LOOPBACK
MUX
MODULATOR
DATA
MODULATOR
MODULE
TX IF OUT
DEMODULATOR
DATA
DEMODULATOR
MODULE
RX IF IN
RX DATA/CLOCK
RX DATA
Interface loopback provides loopback at the interface between the interface module and the modulator/demodulator.
The near end equipment loops through the interface module.
The far end equipment loops through the modulator/demodulator.
Figure 4-20. Interface Loopback
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
4.3 Clocking Options
Clocking of data between the terrestrial network and the satellite network depends on the application. Sections 4.3.1 and 4.3.2 define the G.703 and ECL/MIL-STD-188 clocking configurations.
4.3.1 G.703 Interface Clocking
Refer to Figure 4-21 for the clocking diagram.
4.3.1.1 TX Timing
The TX timing for the G.703 interface is always recovered from the send data supplied by the terrestrial network. The recovered TX terrestrial clock is used as the reference to send information over the satellite network.
4.3.1.2 RX Timing
The RX (satellite) clock is recovered from information demodulated and decoded from the satellite network.
4.3.1.2.1 RX Timing (with Buffer)
If a plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is used, data received from the satellite network is clocked into the buffer using the RX (satellite) clock. Data is clocked out of the buffer and to the terrestrial network referenced to one of the four selectable clock sources listed in the table below:
INTERNAL CLOCK
TX TERRESTRIAL CLOCK
EXT. REF. CLOCK
RX CLOCK (See note)
Generated internal to the modem
Recovered from the terrestrial send data
External reference supplied by the terrestrial network
Recovered from the RX satellite network
Note: When the RX clock is selected as the buffer clock source, the input and output of the buffer are clocked by the same source. In this mode, the buffer is virtually bypassed with a delay defined by the selected buffer size.
4.3.1.2.2 RX Timing (without Buffer)
If a plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is not used, RX data from the satellite network is clocked to the terrestrial network using the RX (satellite) clock.
Rev.4
4–53
Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
4.3.2 ECL/MIL-STD-188 Interface Clocking
Refer to Figure 4-22 for the clocking diagram.
4.3.2.1 TX Timing
The TX timing for the ECL/MIL-STD-188 interface is always provided with the send data supplied by the terrestrial network. The TX clock provided by the terrestrial network is used as the reference to send information over the satellite network.
The modem provides a send timing reference clock to the terrestrial equipment. This clock is internally generated by the modem and can be used to time the send data to the modem. Optionally, the send timing reference can be switched to loop timing mode. The loop timing mode provides the RX (satellite) clock as the send timing reference.
4.3.2.2 RX Timing
The RX (satellite) clock is recovered from information demodulated and decoded from the satellite network.
4.3.2.2.1 RX Timing (with Buffer)
If a plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is used, data received from the satellite network is clocked into the buffer using the RX (satellite) clock. Data is clocked out of the buffer and to the terrestrial network referenced to one of the four selectable clock sources listed in the table below:
INTERNAL CLOCK
TX TERRESTRIAL CLOCK
EXT. REF. CLOCK
RX CLOCK (See note)
Generated internal to the modem.
Provided by the terrestrial network.
External reference supplied by the terrestrial network.
Recovered from the RX satellite network.
Note: When the RX clock is selected as the buffer clock source, the input and output of the buffer are clocked by the same source. In this mode, the buffer is virtually bypassed with a delay defined by the selected buffer size.
4.3.2.2.2 RX Timing (without Buffer)
If a plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is not used, data received from the satellite network is clocked to the terrestrial network using the RX (satellite) clock.
4–54 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Operation
Figure 4-21. G.703 Interface Clocking Diagram
Rev.4
Figure 4-22. ECL/MIL-STD-188 Interface Clocking Diagram
4–55
Rev.4
5.1 Display/M&C
5
Chapter 5.
THEORY OF OPERATION
This chapter includes theory of operation for the various PCBs in the modem.
5.1.1 Description
The display/Monitor & Control (M&C) PCB is located on the front panel. The M&C monitors the modem and provides configuration updates to other modules within the modem when necessary.
The modem configuration parameters are maintained in battery-backed Random Access
Memory (RAM), which provides total recovery after a power-down situation. The M&C functions include extensive fault monitoring and status reporting. All modem functions are accessible through a local front panel interface and a remote communications interface.
Refer to Figure 3-1 for a drawing of the M&C card. A block diagram of the M&C is shown in Figure 5-1.
5–1
Theory of Operation z
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
RS-232-C
RS-485
Figure 5-1. Display/M&C Block Diagram
5.1.2 Theory of Operation
The M&C card is composed of the following subsections:
•
Microcontroller
•
Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)
•
Read Only Memory (ROM)
•
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
•
RAM
•
Inter-modem communications
•
Front panel user interface
•
Remote communications (RS-232/RS-485) user interface
5–2 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
The heart of the M&C card is the Intel 80C32 (or a compatible microcontroller) operating at 16 MHz. This microcontroller contains 256 kbytes of internal RAM. At
U17, a ROM can be:
•
27C010 (128 kbytes)
•
27C020 (256 kbytes)
•
27C040 (512 kbytes)
ROM access times must be
≥
200 ns. The correct ROM size can be set by jumpers JP9 and JP10. The RAM can be 8 or 32 kbytes in size. This RAM chip is internally batterybacked and contains a real time clock used by the M&C.
The nonvolatile RAM on the M&C module will retain configuration information without prime power for up to one year. If the modem is powered down, the following sequence is carried out by the M&C microcontroller:
1. When power is applied to the M&C, the microcontroller checks the nonvolatile memory to see if valid data has been retained. If valid data has been retained, the modem is reconfigured to those parameters.
2. If the nonvolatile memory fails the valid data test, a default configuration from
ROM is loaded into the system.
The UART supports serial ASYNC communications channels (remote port) with a maximum data rate of 19200 bit/s. The UART is memory mapped to the microcontroller.
The communications type can be RS-232 or RS-485 (set with M&C jumpers JP1 and
JP5). For RS-485 communications, 2- or 4-wire operation can be set by jumpers JP2 and
JP3. The remote port is connected to the M&C system interface connector (JP4).
The DAC supplies a voltage that controls the contrast of the display. The ADC monitors all the voltages from the power supply. The DAC and ADC are mapped to the microcontroller with an I 2 C bus.
The inter-modem communications use the internal serial port located in the microcontroller. The inter-modem communications are connected to the M&C system interface connector (JP4) for communication between the modulator, demodulator, and interface cards.
The user interface includes the following parts:
•
Front panel
•
Status LEDs
•
Keyboard
•
Sounder (beeper)
All functions are memory mapped to the microcontroller.
Rev.4
5–3
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.2 Modulator
5.2.1 Description
The modulator PCB fits in the top slot of the modem chassis. The card provides a modulated carrier of 50 to 180 MHz from the interface PCB digital data stream. The types of modulation performed on the transmitted baseband data are:
•
QPSK
•
8PSK (optional)
•
16QAM (optional)
The optional 8PSK and 16QAM modulation provide increased bandwidth efficiency over that of the standard QPSK. Refer to Section 5.6 for a description of the modulation types.
Figure 3-2 shows the modulator PCB. A block diagram of the modulator baseband section is shown in Figure 5-2, and the modulator RF section in Figure 5-3. All modulator jumper settings are listed in Table 3-2.
D0
TX DATA
D1
D2
DIFFERENTIAL
ENCODER
CONVOLUTIONAL
ENCODER
2
2
2
PUNCTURE
LOGIC
PARALLEL
TO
SERIAL MUX
VECTOR
MAPPING
2
CW
TEST
MODES
2
2
2
DIGITAL
EQUALIZER
DIGITAL
EQUALIZER
NYQUIST
FILTER
NYQUIST
FILTER
I BASEBAND
OUTPUT
Q BASEBAND
OUTPUT
Figure 5-2. Modulator Baseband Section Block Diagram
5–4 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
Figure 5-3. Modulator RF Section Block Diagram
Rev.4
5–5
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.2.2 Specifications
Modulation Types
Data Rate Range
Symbol Rate Range
Frequency Range
Frequency Select Method
Frequency Step Size
Frequency Stability
Phase Error
Filtering Type
Spectral Occupancy
Spurious and Harmonics
Output Power
Output Power Stability
Output Power Adjustment
Output Impedance
Output Return Loss
Differential Encoding
FEC Encoding
I/O Connector
Reported Faults
•
QPSK
•
(optional)
•
16QAM
6.0 to 52.0 Mbit/s (Four data rate plug-on module)
1.7 to 37.6 Ms/s
50 to 180 MHz
Synthesized
2.5 kHz
Internal Reference:
± 10 PPM oscillator
0.2 PPM high stability option
External Reference (supported with High Stability
Option):
Will lock to external 5, 10, or 20 MHz reference
2.0° maximum
Nyquist, pre-equalized
Spectral density is -30 dB at
±
0.75 symbol rate
-55 dBc
-20 to +5 dBm, in 0.1 dB steps
±
0.5 dB
0.1 dB step size
75 Ω (50 Ω optional)
> 18 dB
2-phase or none
•
Convolutional, K = 7
•
QPSK rates 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
•
8PSK rates 2/3, 5/6 (Trellis)
•
16QAM rates 3/4, 7/8
96-pin DIN
•
IF
•
Data Clock Activity
•
Data Clock Synthesizer
• I Channel Activity
•
Q Channel Activity
•
AGC
•
External SCT Synthesizer
•
External Reference Activity
5–6 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
5.2.3 Theory of Operation
The modulator PCB is composed of eight basic subsections. The first five subsections comprise the baseband processing circuits, and the last three form the RF circuits.
Baseband Section
RF Section
Slave processor
Differential encoder
Convolutional encoder
Digital FIR equalizer filter
Analog Nyquist filter
Quadrature modulator
IF strip
RF synthesizer
The modulator M&C controls all the programmable functions of the module. Fault information from the modulator is sent to the host M&C. Faults reported include:
•
IF Synthesizer
•
Data Clock Activity
•
Data Clock Synthesizer
•
I Channel Activity
•
Q Channel Activity
•
AGC Level
•
External SCT Synthesizer
•
External Reference Activity
The data for transmission comes from the interface card. The data is first differentially encoded (QPSK operation), and then convolutional encoding takes place. For QPSK modulation, processing is done in accordance with IESS-308 for data rates above
10 Mbit/s.
Each of the three encoders output two parallel code bits (referred to as a symbol) from every data bit input. The encoder is a 7-bit shift register with two modulo-two adders.
The weighting function is an octal number denoting the taps of the shift register that go to the adders, and are W
0
= 171 and W
1
= 133. The code bits (designated C
0
and C
1
) form the transmission symbol.
The symbols out of the encoder enable the Viterbi decoder at the other end of the link to correct received errors. “Puncturing” is used for 3/4 and 7/8 rate encoding. For 3/4 rate,
3 bits input to the encoder generate 6 parallel code bits out, of which 2 are deleted or
“punctured.” For 7/8 rate, 7 bits input to the encoder generate 14 parallel code bits out, but 6 are deleted.
Rev.4
5–7
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
The puncture patterns for the 3/4 and 7/8 rate encoders are as follows:
Puncture Pattern
Code Rate C0
3/4
7/8
101 110
C1
1000101 1111010
Notes:
1. 1 = code bits to be transmitted
2. 0 = deleted code bits
When using 5/6 rate 8PSK operation, 3/4 rate puncturing is used for every five input bits to the encoder. No puncturing is done for 2/3 rate 8PSK. The 16QAM operation is similar to QPSK, except that twice as much information is sent per symbol time as in
QPSK.
At the outputs of the encoders, the data is grouped and split into the following number of separate data streams:
Modulation Type No. of Data Streams
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
2
3
4
This data is fed into a look-up table for a Digital-to-Analog (D/A) converter to perform amplitude equalization of the rectangular pulses. The amplitude-equalized data is passed to the analog Nyquist filters for spectral shaping, as well as delay equalization.
The pulse-shaped I and Q baseband data is applied to the RF modulator, which performs translation to the desired IF frequency. The RF synthesizer is a hybrid DDS-PLL design, which accommodates a 2.5 kHz step size with low phase noise, using a single loop. The
RF section has a stability of ± 10 PPM. An optional high stability TCXO can be installed to provide
±
0.2 PPM stability. The IF strip provides gain and amplitude stabilization to control the output from -20 to +5 dBm, in 0.1 dB steps. An AGC circuit maintains the output level to
±
0.5 dB over frequency and temperature.
5–8 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
5.2.4 Theory of Modulation Types
5.2.4.1 Description
The modulation types for the modem include:
•
QPSK
•
8PSK (optional)
•
16QAM (optional)
The PSK data transmission encoding method uses the phase modulation technique. This method varies the phase angle of the carrier wave to represent a different bit value for the receiver. The higher levels of modulation are required for an operating range that has a limited bandwidth.
The QAM method uses a combination of differential phase shifts and amplitudes totaling
16 different states to represent different bit values.
The order of modulation is represented by mPSK or mQAM, where m relates to the number of discrete modulation states. The following table is a brief description of the modulation types:
QPSK
8PSK
4 discrete phase angles represent the 4 possible combinations of
2 symbols.
8 discrete phase angles represent 8 possible combinations of 3 symbols generated by the encoder.
16QAM 16 discrete modulation states represent 16 possible combinations of 4 symbols generated by the encoder.
5.2.4.2 QPSK Encoding/Modulation
The modulator converts transmitted baseband data into a modulated QPSK carrier.
Using vector analysis of the constellation pattern, QPSK represents two symbols with the carrier phase angle at 45
°
, 135
°
, 225
°
, or 315
°
. The 1/1, 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 rates encoded at the convolutional encoder (k = 7) provide the desired bit rates as follows:
Code Rate Symbols/Bit Bits/Hz
1/1
1/2
3/4
7/8
1
2
1.33
1.143
2
1
1.5
1.75
Rev.4
5–9
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.2.4.3 8PSK Encoding/Modulation
The modulator converts the transmit baseband data into a modulated 8PSK carrier by trellis encoding at 2/3 or 5/6 rate. The 2/3 rate encoder generates 3 symbols for every
2 bits input, while the 5/6 rate encoder generates 6 symbols for every 5 bits input. Using vector analysis of the constellation pattern generated by the modulator, 8 discrete phase angles (0
°
, 45
°
, 90
°
, 135
°
, 180
°
, 225
°
, 270
°
, and 315
°
) represent 8 possible combinations of 3 symbols generated by the encoder. The 2/3 and 5/6 rates encoded at the trellis encoder provide the desired bit rates as follows:
Code Rate Symbols/Bit Bits/Hz
2/3
5/6
1.5
1.2
2
2.5
In 8PSK operation, the hardware to perform Reed-Solomon block encoding is required to achieve better performance. Refer to Appendix A for details on Reed-Solomon operation.
5.2.4.4 16QAM Encoding/Modulation
The modulator converts the transmit baseband data into a modulated 16QAM carrier at
3/4 or 7/8 rate. The modulator punctures the data by using the industry standard k = 7,
1/2 rate convolutional code and 3/4 and 7/8 punctured patterns. The 3/4 rate convolutional encoder generates 4 symbols for every 3 bits input, while the 7/8 rate convolutional encoder generates 8 symbols for every 7 bits input.
Using vector analysis of the constellation pattern generated by the modulator, 16 discrete phase angle/amplitude states represent the 16 possible combinations of 4 symbols generated by the encoder. The bit rates for 16QAM 3/4 and 7/8 rate convolutional encoding are as follows:
Code Rate Symbols/Bit Bits/Hz
3/4
7/8
1.33
1.143
3
3.5
In 16QAM operation, the hardware to perform Reed-Solomon block encoding is required to achieve the best operational characteristics and performance. Refer to Appendix A for information on Reed-Solomon operation.
5–10 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
5.3 Demodulator
5.3.1 Description
The demodulator PCB fits in the bottom slot of the modem chassis. The demodulator converts PSK and QAM modulated carriers within the 50 to 180 MHz range to a demodulated baseband data stream. The demodulator then performs FEC on the data stream, using the Viterbi decoding algorithm.
The converted modulation types are:
•
QPSK
•
8PSK (optional)
•
16QAM (optional)
Refer to Section 5.6 for a description of the modulation types. Figure 3-3 shows the demodulator PCB. A block diagram of the demodulator is shown in Figure 5-4, and all demodulator jumper settings are listed in Table 3-3.
5.3.2 Specifications
Modulation Types
Data Rate Range
Symbol Rate Range
IF Frequency
Input Power (Desired Carrier)
Input Impedance
Input Return Loss
Forward Error Correction
Carrier Acquisition Range
Filtering Type
QPSK
8PSK (optional)
16QAM (optional)
6.0 to 52.0 Mbit/s (four data rate plug-on module)
1.7 to 37.6 Ms/s
50 to 180 MHz, in 2.5 kHz steps
-45 to -25 dBm
75 Ω (50 Ω optional)
> 18 dBm
Viterbi k=7
±
60 kHz
Nyquist
Rev.4
5–11
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
From
RF Demod
I
Q
Σ
Σ
I and Q
Nyquist Filter
Daughterboard
SYMBCK
DIVIDER
(
÷
2,4,8,16)
A/D
I Channel
Offset
Control
A/D
Soft
Decision
LUT
(SRAM)
SCLK
2/3 SCLK
EN13
13
AMB
OUT OF SYNC
Commutator,
6
6
Rate
Exchange,
Depuncture,
6
Ambiguity
Resolver,
Decoder
Order Detect
3
2
Viterbi
Decoder
Viterbi
Decoder
Viterbi
Decoder
Digital Delay Line
3-Bit x 526 Deep
3
3
3
8-PSK Parallel to Serial,
3 x 3 Barrel
Shifter,
3 x3 Parallel
Differential
Decoder,
Extended E b
/N
0
Monitor
PLL
DATCLK/3
÷
2
To
Interface
TTL to
ECL
DATA
DATCLK/3
20MHZREF
To Host
M&C
Local
M&C
Clock Loop
Costas Loop
1/2 DDS
1/2 DDS
AOC/AGC
I-OFFSET
Q-OFFSET
DAC
DAC
PLL
( x 8 )
SYNTHREF
AGC
To RF Demod
Figure 5-4. Demodulator Block Diagram
5–12 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
5.3.3 Theory of Operation
The demodulator functions as an advanced digital coherent phase-lock receiver and
Viterbi decoder. The demodulator is intended to operate at data rates greater than
10 Mbit/s, and complies with the IESS-308 specifications for IDR carriers greater than
10 Mbit/s.
The demodulator provides the following functions:
•
Analog-to-Digital (A/D) conversion of analog baseband data using Automatic
Gain/Offset Control (AGC, AOC)
•
Mapping I and Q values to eight-level soft-decision values
•
Commutation of code words to three parallel decoders per IESS-308 specifications for IDR carriers greater than 10 Mbit/s
•
Symbol clock to data clock rate exchange and depuncturing (null symbol insertion) logic
•
Phase and puncture pattern ambiguity resolution
•
Three parallel Viterbi decoders
•
Three parallel differential decoders
•
A DDS-based digital clock recovery PLL
•
A DDS-based digital carrier recovery PLL (Costas Loop)
•
Local microprocessor based M&C circuitry for control of all aspects of the demodulator operation, as well as performance and fault reporting to the host
M&C
The 50 to 180 MHz modulated IF signal enters the RF Module for conversion to In-phase
(I) and Quadrature (Q) analog baseband channels. The I and Q channels are then passed to the Nyquist filter daughter board, where I and Q are filtered through identical analog
Nyquist filters. The output of the Nyquist filters is passed back down to the demodulator board through the offset amplifiers and A/D converters. Optionally, the output of the
I channel A/D can be delayed by half a symbol period for Offset QPSK operation
(OQPSK). The digitized I and Q data is a filtered, digital representation of the received signal.
Rev.4
5–13
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
The digital data is then sent to four separate circuits:
•
AGC/AOC
•
Carrier recovery (Costas) loop
•
Clock recovery loop
•
Soft decision mapping
The AGC/AOC provides a gain feedback signal to the RF module, and an offset feedback signal to the offset amplifiers just prior to the Nyquist filters. This closed-loop control ensures that the digital representation of the I and Q channels is optimized for the
Costas and clock loops, as well as the soft-decision mapping circuitry.
The digital Costas loop, in conjunction with a Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS), performs the carrier recovery function. The Costas loop consists of the following circuits
(all implemented digitally):
•
Costas phase detector
•
Loop filter
•
DDS
The DDS performs the function of a VCO in an analog implementation, but can be easily programmed to the desired center frequency via the local M&C. The output of the DDS is sent to the RF module and provides the reference to which the quadrature local oscillator is locked. The local M&C sweeps the local oscillator (via DDS programming) through the user specified sweep range. When the Viterbi decoder determines that the modem is locked, the local M&C stops the sweep and begins the de-stress process. This involves fine tuning the DDS based on the phase error in the Costas loop. The de-stress process continues as long as the modem is locked. If the carrier is interrupted, the local
M&C resumes the sweep process.
The digital clock loop, in conjunction with the other half of the DDS, performs the clock recovery function. The clock loop consists of the following circuits (all implemented digitally):
•
Phase detector
•
Loop filter
•
DDS
5–14 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
The DDS performs the function of a VCO in an analog implementation, but can be easily programmed to the desired center frequency via the local M&C. Another PLL is used to generate the 1/3 data clock frequency (decoder clock) from the symbol clock. The decoder clock PLL uses outputs of the rate exchange circuit to maintain the proper phase relationship. The recovered decoder and symbol clocks are then used throughout the demodulator.
The soft-decision Look Up Table (LUT) converts the digital I and Q data from the analog-to-digital converters into 3-bit soft-decision values. The soft-decision values represent the binary data that was transmitted from the modulator, and subsequently corrupted by noise in the transmission channel. These values are then passed to the following circuits:
•
Commutator
•
Depuncture
•
Ambiguity resolver
The soft-decision data is commutated into three parallel paths at 1/3 of the symbol rate.
The commutator is simply a three-stage shift register, the output of which is loaded into the three parallel depuncture circuits on every third symbol clock.
The depuncture circuit inserts null symbols into the soft-decision data stream just prior to the Viterbi decoders. The positions of the null symbols are dictated by the code rate in use. Since additional symbols are inserted into the data stream, the decoder clock PLL is also synchronized to the depuncture logic.
The demodulator can lock up with phase and/or depuncture pattern ambiguities.
Therefore, the ambiguity resolver cycles through every combination of these ambiguities until the Viterbi decoders achieve synchronization.
Each of the Viterbi decoders receives two parallel code words (G0 and G1) which are
3-bit soft decision data out of the depuncture logic. In addition to the code words, null symbol indicators are also received from the depuncture logic, which indicate to the
Viterbi decoder which symbols were punctured out at the encoder. This data is processed by the k=7 Viterbi decoder algorithm embedded in the decoder. If, while the state metric normalization rate is monitored, it exceeds a pre-defined threshold, the out-of-sync condition is indicated. This indicator is fed back to the ambiguity resolution logic (see above) so that all possible ambiguity states can be tried. The Viterbi decoders each incorporate a BER monitor which the local M&C can interrogate for performance monitoring. The corrected data is output to the differential decoders.
After the differential decoders, the three serial bit streams, as well as the 1/3 data clock, are converted to differential ECL for transfer across the system motherboard to the interface board.
Rev.4
5–15
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.4 Viterbi Decoder
5.4.1 Description
The modem Viterbi decoder circuitry is located on the demodulator PCB (bottom slot of the modem chassis) and operates in conjunction with the convolutional encoder at the transmit modem. The decoder uses a decoding algorithm to provide FEC on the received data stream for errors occurring in the transmission channel.
A block diagram of the Viterbi decoder is shown in Figure 5-5.
5.4.2 Specifications
BER
Maximum Data Rate
Synchronization Time
Output Fault Indicators
Raw BER Detection
Constraint Length
See Figure 1-4 and Table 1-2
25 Mbit/s (on each of 3 channels)
8000 bits (maximum)
Activity detection of I and Q data sign bits
From 0 to 255 bits out of 1024 samples
7
5–16
Figure 5-5. Viterbi Decoder Block Diagram
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
5.4.3 Theory of Operation
The Viterbi decoder processes 3-bit quantized R0 and R1 parallel code bits or symbols from the demodulator. The quantization is 3-bit soft decision in offset binary format.
This data is a representation of the data transmitted, corrupted by additive white
Gaussian noise. The task of the decoder is to determine which symbols have been corrupted by the transmission channel and to correct as many errors as possible. The code symbols produced by the encoder provide the data for this task.
The Viterbi decoder performs four functions for providing FEC. The functions used in processing the data stream are:
•
Computing Branch Metric Values
•
ASC Computer Processing
•
Memory Storage
•
Synchronization Detect
A set of branch metric values is then computed for each of the received symbol pairs.
This is related to the probability that the received symbol pair was actually transmitted as one of the four possible symbol pairs.
The branch metrics are then processed by the Add-Select-Compare (ASC) computer. The
ASC computer makes decisions about the most probable transmitted symbol stream.
These decisions are made when the ASC processes the current branch metrics with the state metrics computed for the previous 64 decoder inputs.
The results of the ASC computer are stored in the path memory (80 states in depth). The path with the maximum metric is designated as the survivor path and its data is used for output. The difference between the minimum and maximum path metrics is used as the means of determining synchronization of the decoder. A synchronization signal is used for lock-detect and sent to the M&C.
The raw BER count is generated from the minimum and maximum metrics and sent to the M&C for further processing. Refer to Table 1-2 and Figure 1-4 for typical Viterbi decoder BER performance specifications.
Rev.4
5–17
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.5 Interface
5.5.1 Description
The interface PCB fits in the middle slot of the modem chassis. The interface PCB provides synchronous data interfacing for terrestrial data and overhead signals and a means for modem fault reporting. The terrestrial interface functions include:
•
MUX ESC overhead into the data
•
DEMUX the received data
•
Buffering the received data
•
Monitoring and displaying the interface status without interruption of service
The following types of interfaces with options are available:
Interface Type
G.703
G.703
G.703 (IDR)
G.703 (8.448)
G.703 (8.448)
G.703 (8.448)
G.703
G.703
G.703 (64K)
ECL
ECL
ECL
PECL
PECL
PECL
MIL-STD-188
MIL-STD-188
MIL-STD-188
Interface P/N
3971-1
3971-2
3971-3
3971-4
3971-5
3971-6
5618-1
5618-2
5618-3
4477-11
4477-21
4477-31
4477-12
4477-22
4477-32
4477-13
4477-23
4477-33
Base
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Buffer
Options
ESC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Note: In addition, an optional plug-on module supports Reed-Solomon (RS) coding and decoding. The Reed-Solomon Codec works in conjunction with the convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding. This includes additional framing, interleaving, and processing to provide concatenated FEC. This option can only be installed on interfaces with a buffer.
Refer to Appendix A for further Reed-Solomon information.
Figures 3-4, 3-5, and 3-6 show the interface PCBs. A block diagram of the interface PCB is shown in Figure 5-6.
5–18 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
5.5.2 Digital Interface Specifications
Physical Interfaces
Scrambling/Descrambling
Buffer (Optional)
Buffer Size
Buffer Clock Source
Buffer Centering
Buffer Depth
Internal Clock Stability
Loopback
Reported Faults and Alarms
ESC Audio AS/3971
ESC Audio AS/5618
Audio Encoding
Audio Interface
Audio Input Level
Audio Output Level
Audio Filtering
ESC Data Channel
Data Phasing
Octet Timing
Main Channel
G.703
ECL/PECL
MIL-STD-188
IDR, per IESS-308
V.35, per CCITT V.35
EFD (SDM-450 compatible)
None
Plesiochronous
2 to 32 ms, in 2 ms steps
TX Terrestrial
RX Satellite (Bypass)
External
Internal
Manual and automatic on buffer underflows/overflows
Displayed on front panel from 1 to 99%
±
100 PPM
Baseband
Interface
TX Data/AIS
TX Clock PLL
TX Clock Activity
TX Programming
TX Configuration
Buffer Underflow/Overflow
Buffer Full
Buffer Clock PLL
Buffer Clock Activity
RX Data/AIS
Frame BER
DEMUX Lock
RX 2047 Lock
RX Programming
RX Configuration
Engineering Service Channel
2 duplex ADPCM channels
2 duplex ADPCM channels, or one 64 kbit/s RS-422 data channel
CCITT G.721
600 Ω transformer balanced 4-wire.
-20 to +10 dBm for 0 dBm, in 1 dB steps
-20 to +10 dBm for 0 dBm, in 1 dB steps
Internal 300 to 3400 Hz input/output
8 kbit/s, RS-422
Per RS-449: data changes on the rising clock transition and is sampled on the falling edge
Octet high with every 8th bit: aligns with frame bit d8
Rev.4
5–19
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.5.2.1 G.703
Data Rate
External Clock Range
External Clock Input
G.703
8.448 Mbit/s
32.064 Mbit/s
34.368 Mbit/s
44.736 Mbit/s
51.840 Mbit/s
1.544 to 20.0 MHz, in 8 kHz steps, or at the receive data rate
0.5 to 5.0V P-P
Sine wave or square wave
Duty cycle 50%,
±
10%
75 Ω impedance
5.5.2.2 ECL
Data Rate
External Clock Range
External Clock Input
ECL
6.0 to 52.0 Mbit/s, in 1 bit/s steps
1.544 to 20.0 MHz, in 8 kHz steps, or at the receive data rate
Standard ECL levels
Duty cycle 50%,
±
10%
100
Ω
impedance
5.5.2.3 MIL-STD-188
Data Rate
External Clock Range
External Clock Input
MIL-STD-188
6.0 to 13.0 Mbit/s, in 1 bit/s steps
1.544 to 13.0 MHz, in 8 kHz steps, or at the receive data rate
4V,
±
2V differential
Duty cycle 50%,
±
10%
100 Ω impedance
5–20 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.5.3 Theory of Operation
The Interface PCB consists of the following basic subsections:
•
TX terrestrial receivers (data and clock)
•
RX terrestrial drivers (data and clock)
•
TX overhead MUX (ESC optional)
•
TX overhead receivers and processor
•
RX overhead DEMUX (ESC optional)
•
RX overhead processor and drivers
•
Baseband loopback relays
•
Interface loopback MUX
•
Plesiochronous buffer (optional)
•
Buffer clock MUX
•
Modem fault/alarm relays
•
Modem fault TTL outputs
•
Backward alarms (ESC optional)
•
Local monitor and control processor
Refer to Figure 5-6 for the interface block diagram.
Theory of Operation
Rev.4
5–21
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5–22
Figure 5-6. Interface Block Diagram
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
5.5.3.1 Transmit Data Path
Terrestrial data is passed through the baseband loopback relay, and is translated from the selected baseband format into TTL. If the terrestrial data is in G.703 format, the data rate clock is recovered from the data and line coding (B3ZS, etc.) is removed.
An alarm can optionally be set for AIS or data stable (AIS/Data) conditions. Blocks of
16 kbit/s of data are examined. If alarm on AIS is selected and fewer than 16 zeros are found in a block, the alarm is asserted. If alarm on data stable is selected and fewer than
16 zeros or fewer than 16 ones are found in a block, the alarm is asserted.
The data is dejittered to remove pattern jitter from the modulator spectrum. If a transmit fault is detected, AIS is substituted for the transmit data. If transmit 2047 data is selected, the transmit data is substituted with a pseudo-random 2047 pattern (using the internal clock if no data clock is available).
If ESC overhead is selected, 96 kHz of additional data is inserted into the transmit data stream per IESS-308, where applicable. This data includes:
•
Two ADPCM audio channels or one 64 kbit/s digital data channel (64 kbit/s digital channel available only with the AS/5618 interface)
•
Four backward alarms
•
8 kbit/s digital data channel
If the scrambler is enabled and Reed-Solomon encoding is not used, the data is then scrambled. The standard IDR scrambler is normally used. The following three scramblers are selectable:
IDR IESS-308
V.35
CCITT V.35
EFD Compatible with the proprietary alternate scrambler used by the SDM-450
Unscrambled data is passed to an installed and enabled Reed-Solomon Codec. This plug-on module includes a scrambler, and does not have interface board scrambler selection. Coded data is returned. The data is then sent through the interface loopback logic to the modulator.
Rev.4
5–23
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.5.3.2 Receive Data Path
Data from the demodulator is routed directly to an installed and enabled Reed-Solomon
Codec and decoded data is returned. The returned data is descrambled by the
Reed-Solomon onboard descrambler (if enabled).
If Reed-Solomon is not used, one of the three descramblers (or no descrambler) can be selected. The ESC overhead is then removed from the descrambled or decoded data.
If receive 2047 data is selected, the data is searched for the pseudo-random 2047 pattern.
The error rate is measured after finding the pattern. If the error rate exceeds one error in a hundred bits (over a 16 kbit/s interval), the pattern search is resumed. The measured error rate can be monitored from the front panel of the modem. During the pattern search, “no data available” is reported. An alarm on AIS or a data stable state can be selected as in the transmit path.
An optional plesiochronous buffer removes Doppler shift and clock differences from the data. The frame size presumed to implement the plesiochronous slips is implied by the data rate. There are two standards for the 34.368 Mbit/s data rate (see table below). The selection must be made from the front panel.
Data Rate
8.448 Mbit/s
32.064 Mbit/s
34.368 Mbit/s
44.736 Mbit/s
51.840 Mbit/s
Frame Structures
None
G.704
G.742
G.745
None
G.752
None
G.751
G.753
None
G.752
None
STS1
The buffer depth can be programmed from 2 to 32 ms, in 2 ms increments. The terrestrial side of the buffer can be clocked by one of the following sources:
•
Clock recovered from the TX terrestrial data (dejittered)
•
Clock recovered by the demodulator (RX satellite)
•
External clock
•
Internal clock
•
High stability clock (if installed on the modulator)
5–24 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
The buffer clock source selection must fall within the following parameters:
G.703 Interface
TX Terrestrial
RX Satellite
No restrictions.
No restrictions.
External Clock Must be in the range from 1.544 to 20 MHz, in 8 kHz steps, or at the RX terrestrial data rate.
Internal Clock No restrictions.
ECL Interface
TX Terrestrial TX and RX terrestrial clocks (data rates) must be divisible by 8 kHz, or the
TX data rate must be the same as the RX data rate.
RX Satellite No restrictions.
External Clock The external clock must be in the range from 1.544 to 20 MHz, in 8 kHz steps, and the RX (data rate) clock must be divisible by 8 kHz.
Additionally, the external clock may be at the RX (data) clock rate.
Internal Clock Refer to “TX Terrestrial.” This clock is at the same frequency as the TX terrestrial clock.
MIL-STD-188 Interface
TX Terrestrial TX and RX terrestrial clocks (data rates) must be divisible by 8 kHz, or the transmit data rate must be the same as the receive data rate.
No restrictions.
RX Satellite
External Clock The external clock must be in the range from 1.544 to 20 MHz, in 8 kHz steps, and the RX (data rate) clock must be divisible by 8 kHz.
Additionally, the external clock may be at the RX (data) clock rate.
Internal Clock Refer to “TX Terrestrial.” This clock is at the same frequency as the TX terrestrial clock.
Note: G.703 interfaces have the option of HDB3 or B3ZS line coding data to the terrestrial interface. This selection shall be made by the user.
Rev.4
5–25
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.5.3.3 Loopbacks
5.5.3.3.1 Baseband Loopback
Baseband loopback provides loopback at the terrestrial interface. The near end equipment loops back through the baseband loopback relays. The far end equipment loops through the demodulator, interface, and modulator. Refer to Figure 5-7 for a block diagram.
TX DATA/CLOCK
BASEBAND
LOOPBACK
RELAYS
TERRESTRIAL
DATA/CLOCK
TX DATA
RX DATA
INTERFACE
MODULE
MODULATOR
DATA MODULATOR
MODULE
TX IF OUT
DEMODULATOR
DATA
DEMODULATOR
MODULE
RX IF IN
RX DATA/CLOCK
Figure 5-7. Baseband Loopback Block Diagram
5–26 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
5.5.3.3.2 Interface Loopback
Interface loopback provides loopback at the interface between the interface module and the modulator/demodulator. The near end equipment loops through the interface module and the far end equipment loops through the modulator/demodulator. Refer to Figure 5-8 for a block diagram.
TX DATA/CLOCK
TERRESTRIAL
DATA/CLOCK
INTERFACE
MODULE
TX DATA
INTERFACE
LOOPBACK
MUX
MODULATOR
DATA
MODULATOR
MODULE
TX IF OUT
DEMODULATOR
DATA
DEMODULATOR
MODULE
RX IF IN
RX DATA/CLOCK
RX DATA
Figure 5-8. Interface Loopback Block Diagram
5.5.3.4 Engineering Service Channel (ESC)
The ESC includes the following features:
•
Two full duplex audio channels or one 64 kbit/s data channel
•
A full duplex 8 kbit/s data stream
•
Four backward alarms (described in IESS-308)
Rev.4
5–27
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
5.6 Backward Alarm Theory and Connections
Four sets of transmit and receive backward alarms are available to implement the structure defined in IESS-308. Backward alarms are sent to the distant side of an IDR link to signal that trouble has occurred at the receive side (which may have resulted from an improper transmission).
Implementation is straightforward in a simple, single destination link. INTELSAT specifies that any major failure of the downlink chain is to generate a backward alarm.
The modem has a receive fault relay which de-energizes in the event of a receive fault. In order for this relay to be connected to the appropriate backward alarm input, the fault tree for this signal includes the appropriate overhead framing faults.
This signal also includes faults in the downlink chain, since major problems with the antenna, Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), down converter, and other components will cause an interruption in service, and fault the modem.
The outputs of the receive fault relay are available as follows:
• Pins DF-C and DF-NO on the 50-pin D interface connector (J8)
• 9-pin D modem fault connector (J7)
The relay contacts are named for the faulted state. If a receive fault does not occur, DF-C is connected to DF-NO.
The preferred method of using a backward alarm in a modem single destination system is to connect the signals at the IDR data interface, either at the modem in a non-redundant system, or at the protection switch (if used).
Signal Pin #
GND
BWI1
BWI2
DB50-2
DB50-12
DB50-13
BWI3
BWI4
DB50-14
DB50-15
DF–C DB50-16
DF–NO DB50-50
This method signals faults on all four alarm channels, and is compatible with a redundancy system. The method assumes that the same modem handles traffic in both directions in each single destination link.
5–28 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Theory of Operation
More complicated systems may be handled by connecting the appropriate outputs of the receive fault relay to the appropriate backward alarm inputs. In a multidestination system, the relay might only be connected to the particular backward alarm assigned to that link. Refer to IESS-308 for further clarification.
There are two methods for detecting a backward alarm that is being received on a particular link:
• Each backward alarm output drives a Form C relay with all three contacts available on the data connector.
• If a modem (or switch) is integrated into a computer network through the modem
(or switch) RS-232-C or RS-485 remote interface connector, the status of all transmit and receive backward alarms may be read through that port.
Refer to Appendix B for remote control operation information.
Rev.4
5–29
Theory of Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
This page is intentionally left blank.
5–30 Rev. 4
Rev. 4
6
Chapter 6.
MAINTENANCE
This chapter provides system checkout and troubleshooting information.
6.1 System Checkout
This section provides instructions for checking the modem setup within the earth station.
Due to the complexity of the modem circuitry, this checkout procedure should be used as a basic guideline only. Maintenance tests that are more complicated are beyond the scope of this manual.
The system checkout consists of test instructions for the interface, modulator, and demodulator PCBs. The instructions include tables and test points for ensuring that the
E b
/N
0
, typical output spectrums, typical eye patterns, and constellation pictures are correct. If a test failure occurs, refer to Section 6.2 for the fault isolation procedures.
CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
PCBs.
6.1.1 Interface
Use the following procedure and the test setup in Figure 6-1 to inspect the interface PCB.
Refer to Chapter 5 for the interface specifications. Section 6.1.4.1 lists the interface test points and signal names. Figure 6-5 shows the test point locations.
6–1
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
NOISE
GENERATOR
VAR ATTEN
TX IF
RX IF
MODEM
UNDER
TEST
DATA
CONNECTORS
VAR ATTEN
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER
BER
TEST SET
Figure 6-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup
1. Ensure the interface is configured for the proper mode of operation. Refer to
Chapter 3 for configuration jumper settings.
2. Connect a BER test set to the appropriate modem data connector as shown in
Figure 6-1. Refer to Chapter 2 for the following data connections: a.
MIL-STD-188 b. G.703
c.
ECL d. PECL
3. Set up the modem for baseband loopback operation by using the Configuration
Interface front panel menu (refer to Chapter 4). The test set should run error free.
Refer to Figure 4-19 for a block diagram of the baseband loopback operation.
4. Change the modem from baseband loopback to interface loopback operation by using the Configuration Interface front panel menu (refer to Chapter 4). The test set should run error free. Refer to Chapter 4 for a block diagram of the interface loopback operation.
6–2 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Maintenance
6.1.2 Modulator
Use the following procedure and the test setup shown in Figure 6-1 to check out the modulator PCB. Refer to Chapter 5 for the modulator specifications. Section 6.1.4.2 lists the modulator test points and signal names. Figure 6-6 shows the test point locations.
1. Set up the modem for IF loopback operation by using the Configuration
Demodulator front panel menu, or use an external IF loop with attenuation. Refer to Chapter 4 for a block diagram of the IF loopback operation.
2. Clear all TX faults by correct use of data and clock selection (refer to
Chapter 4).
3. Measure the E b
/N
0
with a receiver that is known to be properly operating. Refer to Figure 6-2 and the following tables to check for proper E b
/N
0
level:
Modulation Type
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
Table
6-1
6-2
6-3
Figure 6-2 is an example of a 1/2 rate carrier operating at an E b
/N
0
of 7.8 dB.
The (S+N)/N is measured by taking the average level of the noise and the average level of the modem spectrum top as shown. Use this measurement for the first column on the appropriate table as listed above. Read across the page to find the S/N and E b
/N
0
for the specific code rate. Once the demodulator has locked to the incoming signal, the Monitor menu will display signal level, raw
BER, corrected BER, and E b
/N
0
.
4. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the modem as shown in Figure 6-1. Ensure the IF output meets the appropriate mask and spurious specifications. Measure the power output at different levels and frequencies. A typical output spectrum is shown in Figure 6-3.
5. To check the frequency and phase modulation accuracy: a.
Set the modem to the continuous wave Normal mode by using the Carrier
Mode front panel menu (refer to Chapter 4). This sets the Carrier mode in the OFF condition. A pure carrier should now be present at the IF output.
This should be used for frequency measurement only. Spurious and power measurements will be inaccurate.
b. Set the modem to the continuous wave Offset mode by using the Carrier
Mode front panel menu (refer to Chapter 4). This generates a single upper side-band suppressed carrier signal. Ensure the carrier and sideband suppression is less than -30 dBc.
Rev. 4 6–3
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Figure 6-2. Typical Output Spectrum (with Noise)
6–4
Figure 6-3. Typical Output Spectrum (without Noise)
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Maintenance
(dB)
(S+N)/N
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
Table 6-1. Conversion to S/N and E b
/N
0
Chart (QPSK)
Code Rate 1/2
S/N E b
/N
0
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
Code Rate 3/4
S/N E b
/N
0
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.6
7.2
7.8
8.3
8.9
9.4
0.0
0.8
1.6
2.3
3.0
3.6
4.3
4.9
5.5
6.1
6.7
14.1
14.6
15.2
15.7
16.2
16.7
17.2
17.7
18.2
Code Rate 7/8
S/N E b
/N
0
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
9.3
9.8
10.3
10.9
11.4
11.9
12.4
12.9
6.6
7.1
7.7
8.2
8.8
-0.6
0.2
0.9
1.6
2.3
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
Rev. 4 6–5
Maintenance
(dB)
(S+N)/N
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
Table 6-2. Conversion to S/N and E b
/N
0
Chart (8PSK)
Code Rate 2/3
S/N E b
/N
0
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
8.2
8.7
9.2
9.8
10.3
10.8
11.3
11.9
12.4
12.9
13.4
13.9
14.4
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
6.5
7.1
7.6
-1.2
-0.4
0.3
1.1
1.7
2.4
3.0
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
Code Rate 5/6
S/N E b
/N
0
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
7.2
7.7
8.3
8.8
9.3
9.8
10.4
10.9
11.4
11.9
12.4
12.9
13.4
2.7
3.3
3.9
4.4
5.0
5.6
6.1
6.7
-2.2
-1.4
-0.6
0.1
0.8
1.4
2.1
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6–6 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
(dB)
(S+N)/N
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
Table 6-3. Conversion to S/N and E b
/N
0
Chart (16QAM)
Code Rate 3/4
S/N E b
/N
0
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
6.9
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.1
9.6
10.1
10.6
4.2
4.8
5.3
5.9
6.4
-3.0
-2.2
-1.4
-0.7
-0.0
0.6
1.3
1.9
2.5
3.1
3.6
11.1
11.6
12.1
12.7
13.2
13.7
14.2
14.7
15.2
Code Rate 7/8
S/N E b
/N
0
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
6.3
6.8
7.3
7.9
8.4
8.9
9.4
9.9
3.5
4.1
4.7
5.2
5.7
-3.6
-2.8
-2.1
-1.4
-0.7
-0.0
0.6
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.0
10.4
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
Maintenance
Rev. 4 6–7
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6.1.3 Demodulator
Use the following procedure and the test setup in Figure 6-1 to check out the demodulator PCB. Refer to Chapter 5 for the demodulator specifications. Section 6.1.4.3
lists the demodulator test points and signal names. Figure 6-7 shows the test point locations.
1. Set up the modem with an external IF loop, and level. Use a modulator that is known to be properly operating, and ensure power levels, data rates, code rates, etc., are compatible.
2. Allow the modem to lock up. When the green carrier detect LED is on and the
DEMUX lock fault has been cleared (where applicable), the modem should run at the specified error rate. Run the TX power level (input amplitude) over the full range and offset the TX frequency from the RX frequency by 30 kHz.
Ensure the modem still runs within the specified error rate.
3. Set up the modem to check the constellation patterns with an oscilloscope that is set in the X-Y mode. Typical constellation patterns with noise and without noise are shown in Figure 6-4.
6–8 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Maintenance
WITH NOISE
Rev. 4
WITHOUT NOISE
Figure 6-4. Typical Eye Constellations
6–9
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6.1.4 Test Points
This section lists the interface, modulator, and demodulator PCB test points that can be accessed from the front panel. The list includes a signal description under normal operating conditions.
6.1.4.1 Interface PCB
Refer to Figure 6-5 for G.703, ECL, and MIL-STD-188 test point locations.
Test Points
ECL/MIL-
STD-188
(AS/4477)
G.703
(AS/3971,
AS/5618)
TP12 TP6, 11
TP14
TP11
TP3
TP8
Signal Name
GND
Ground
RX MFS
Receive Sub-Frame Sync (overhead only)
TX MFS
Transmit Sub-Frame Sync (overhead only)
6–10
Figure 6-5. Interface PCB Test Points
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6.1.4.2 Modulator PCB
Refer to Figure 6-6 for test point locations.
Test Points
TP4
TP5
TP8
Signal Name
SYMBOL CLK
Symbol Clock
BIT CLK
Data Clock/3
GND
Ground test point
Figure 6-6. Modulator PCB Test Points
Maintenance
Rev. 4 6–11
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6.1.4.3 Demodulator PCB
Refer to Figure 6-7 for test point locations.
Test Points
TP1
TP2
TP3
TP4
TP5
TP6
Signal Name
AGND.
Analog Ground.
I EYE.
I channel monitor. See Q EYE test point.
DGND.
Ground test point.
Q EYE.
Q channel monitor. The I and Q test points are digital representations of the received filtered signal. To view these test points, use an oscilloscope in the
X-Y mode. The display will be the constellation shown in Figure 6-4.
DGND.
Ground test point.
DCLK.
Data Clock/3.
Figure 6-7. Demodulator PCB Test Points
6–12 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Maintenance
6.2 Fault Isolation
6.2.1 Guidelines
The modem has been designed so that a competent technician can repair a faulty modem on location. All active circuits, except the power supply, can be removed from the modem through the front panel without requiring special tools. The power supply can be removed through the top cover with standard tools.
CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
PCBs.
The fault monitoring capability of the modem is designed to assist the operator in determining which PCB has failed. The faulty PCB can be removed and returned to
EFData for repair. Install a satisfactory spare PCB and continue with the operation.
The fault isolation procedure lists the following categories of faults or alarms. Each fault or alarm category includes possible problems and the appropriate action required to repair the modem.
•
Modulator
•
Demodulator
•
TX Interface
•
RX Interface
•
Common Equipment
•
Backward Alarms
If this troubleshooting procedure does not isolate the problem, and EFData Customer
Support assistance is necessary, have the following information available for the representative:
•
Modem configuration, including the modulator, demodulator, and interface sections
•
Faults (active or stored) (refer to Table 6-4)
Rev. 4 6–13
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6.2.2 System Faults/Alarms
System faults are reported in the Faults/Alarms menu and stored faults are reported in the
Stored Flts/Alms menu (Chapter 4). Refer to the fault tree (Table 6-4) and the list of possible problems in order to determine the appropriate action for repairing the modem
(Section 6.2.1).
6–14 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Table 6-4. SDM-9000 Modem Fault Tree
T
X
I
F
O
U
T
P
U
T
O
F
F
T
X
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
T
X
(1)
R
X
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
R
X
(2)
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
C
O
M
E
Q
C
O
M
E
Q
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
(3)
T
X
L
E
D
A
L
A
R
M
R
E
L
A
Y
A
L
A
R
M
T
X
#
2
(4)
R
X
L
E
D
A
L
A
R
M
R
X
R
E
L
A
Y
A
L
A
R
M
#
3
A
L
A
R
M
(5) (6)
R
R
E
D
D
E
F
E
M
A
I
N
A
I
S
T
X
MODULATOR FAULTS
IF SYNTHESIZER
DATA CLOCK ACT
DATA CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
AGC
INTERNAL SCT SYN
EXT REF ACT
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
DEMODULATOR FAULTS
CARRIER DETECT
IF SYNTHESIZER
RX CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
DESCRAMBLER
BER THRESHOLD
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X
X X
X X
Test Note Fault/Alarm Relay
*
**
4
5
6
1
2
3
TX FAULT
RX FAULT
COM EQ FAULT
TX ALARM #2
RX ALARM #3
Legend
Test Points Connector/Pins
J7/Pin 4 (N.O.), 5 (COM), 6 (N.C.) *
J7/Pin 7 (N.O.), 8 (COM), 9 (N.C.) *
J7/Pin 1 (N.O.), 2 (COM), 3 (N.C.) *
J10/Pin 4 (N.O.), 5 (COM), 6 (N.C.) *
J10/Pin 7 (N.O.), 8 (COM), 9 (N.C.) *
DEF MAINT ALARM J8/Pin 17 **
A connection between the common and N.O. contacts indicate no fault/alarm.
Signal is open collector high impedance if faulted.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
X
A
I
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Maintenance
Rev. 4 6–15
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Table 6-4. SDM-9000 Modem Fault Tree (Continued)
TX INTERFACE FAULTS
TX DATA/AIS
TX CLK PLL
TX CLK ACTIVITY
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
RX INTERFACE FAULTS
BUFFER UNDERFLOW
BUFFER OVERFLOW
RX DATA/AIS
FRAME BER
BUFFER CLK PLL
BUFFER CLK ACT
DEMUX LOCK
RX 2047 LOCK
BUFFER FULL
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
P
U
T
O
U
T
O
F
F
I
F
T
X
X
X
T
X
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
T
X
(1)
R
X
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
R
X
(2)
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
C
O
M
E
Q
C
O
M
E
Q
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
(3)
T
X
L
E
D
A
L
A
R
M
R
E
L
A
Y
A
L
A
R
M
T
X
#
2
(4)
R
X
L
E
D
A
L
A
R
M
R
X
R
E
L
A
Y
A
L
A
R
M
#
3
A
L
A
R
M
(5) (6)
R
R
E
D
D
E
F
E
M
A
I
N
A
I
S
T
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
R
X
A
I
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X
X X
X X
Test Note Fault/Alarm Relay
*
**
3
4
1
2
5
6
TX FAULT
RX FAULT
COM EQ FAULT
TX ALARM #2
Legend
Test Points Connector/Pins
J7/Pin 4 (N.O.), 5 (COM), 6 (N.C.) *
J7/Pin 7 (N.O.), 8 (COM), 9 (N.C.) *
J7/Pin 1 (N.O.), 2 (COM), 3 (N.C.) *
J10/Pin 4 (N.O.), 5 (COM), 6 (N.C.) *
RX ALARM #3
DEF MAINT ALARM
J10/Pin 7 (N.O.), 8 (COM), 9 (N.C.) *
J8/Pin 17 **
A connection between the common and N.O. contacts indicate no fault/alarm.
Signal is open collector high impedance if faulted.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
6–16 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Table 6-4. SDM-9000 Modem Fault Tree (Continued)
P
U
T
O
U
T
O
F
F
I
F
T
X
T
X
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
T
X
(1)
R
X
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
R
X
(2)
L
E
D
F
A
U
L
T
C
O
M
E
Q
C
O
M
E
Q
R
E
L
A
Y
F
A
U
L
T
(3)
T
X
L
E
D
A
L
A
R
M
R
E
L
A
Y
A
L
A
R
M
T
X
#
2
(4)
R
X
L
E
D
A
L
A
R
M
R
X
R
E
L
A
Y
A
L
A
R
M
#
3
A
L
A
R
M
(5) (6)
R
R
E
D
D
E
F
E
M
A
I
N
A
I
S
T
X
R
X
A
I
S
COMMON EQUIPMENT
FAULTS
BATTERY/CLOCK
-12V POWER SUPPLY
+12V POWER SUPPLY
+5V SUPPLY
-5V SUPPLY
CONTROLLER
INTERFACE MODULE
X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
BACKWARD ALARMS
(IDR ONLY)
BW ALARM RX #4
BW ALARM RX #3
BW ALARM RX #2
BW ALARM RX #1
BW ALARM TX #4
BW ALARM TX #3
BW ALARM TX #2
BW ALARM TX #1
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Test Note Fault/Alarm Relay
*
**
3
4
1
2
5
6
TX FAULT
RX FAULT
COM EQ FAULT
TX ALARM #2
Legend
Test Points Connector/Pins
J7/Pin 4 (N.O.), 5 (COM), 6 (N.C.) *
J7/Pin 7 (N.O.), 8 (COM), 9 (N.C.) *
J7/Pin 1 (N.O.), 2 (COM), 3 (N.C.) *
J10/Pin 4 (N.O.), 5 (COM), 6 (N.C.) *
RX ALARM #3
DEF MAINT ALARM
J10/Pin 7 (N.O.), 8 (COM), 9 (N.C.) *
J8/Pin 17 **
A connection between the common and N.O. contacts indicate no fault/alarm.
Signal is open collector high impedance if faulted.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Maintenance
Rev. 4 6–17
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6.2.2.1 Fault/Alarm Display and Description
This section consists of general fault, status, and alarm information that is indicated by the 10 LEDs on the front panel. The LEDs indicate the following information is in the on condition.
Name
TX
RX
Common
Stored
Name
Power ON
Transmitter ON
Carrier Detect
Test Mode
TX
RX
Name
Faults
Color Description
Red A fault condition exists in the TX chain.
Red
Red
A fault condition exists in the RX chain.
A common equipment fault condition exists.
Yellow A fault has been logged and stored. The fault may or may not be active.
Status
Color Description
Green Power is applied to the modem.
Green Transmitter is currently on. This indicator reflects the actual condition of the transmitter, as opposed to the programmed condition.
Green Decoder is locked.
Yellow Flashes when the modem is in a test configuration.
Alarms
Color Description
Yellow A TX function is in an alarm condition.
Yellow A RX function is in an alarm condition.
A fault (red LED) indicates a fault that currently exists in the modem. The LED is turned off when the fault clears.
When a fault occurs, it is stored in the stored fault memory and indicated by the single yellow LED. If the fault clears, the occurrence is also cleared.
A total of 10 occurrences of any fault can be stored. Each fault or stored fault (indicated by a front panel LED) is the sum of many faults. To determine which fault has occurred, use the Fault or Stored Fault front panel menu.
Alarms are considered minor faults which will not switch the modem offline in a redundant system. Alarms are shown in the Fault or Stored Fault front panel menu by a reversed contrast “ + ”.
6–18 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Maintenance
Rev. 4
6.2.2.2 Fault/Alarm Analysis
6.2.2.2.1 Modulator Faults
Fault/Alarm
IF SYNTHESIZER
DATA CLOCK ACT
DATA CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
AGC LEVEL
INTERNAL SCT SYN
EXT REF ACT
Possible Problem and Action
Modulator IF synthesizer is faulted.
This is considered a major fault and will turn off the modulator output. Return the modulator module for repair.
Transmit data clock activity alarm.
This fault is not considered a major fault and will not turn off the modulator output. The problem is most likely on the interface card or external to the modem. Use the baseband loopback and interface loopback test modes for checking the interface. Ensure the incoming data clock is present at the modem DATA I/O connector. If data and clock are present at the DATA I/O, then replace the interface card to clear the alarm and return the card for repair.
Transmit data clock synthesizer fault.
This fault is an indication that the internal clock VCO has not locked to the incoming data clock, or the internal clock synthesizer has not locked to the internal reference. This is considered a major fault and will turn off the modulator output.
Ensure the proper data rate has been set up and selected, and the incoming data rate matches the modem selections.
Activity fault for the I channel digital filter.
This alarm is considered a major fault and will turn off the modulator IF output. An alarm in this position indicates either a fault in the scrambler, or if the scrambler is disabled, it indicates a loss of incoming data. If the fault is active with the scrambler turned off, check for input data at the DATA I/O connector. If data is present, replace the interface card to clear the fault and return the interface card for repair. If the fault is active with the scrambler turned on, replace the modulator card and return it for repair.
Activity fault for the Q channel digital filter. Use the I channel procedure above.
Output power AGC level fault.
Indicates the level at the modulator output is not the programmed level. Replace the modulator card and return it for repair.
Internal TX data clock synthesizer fault.
The SCT has failed to lock to the internal reference. Replace modulator board.
External reference activity alarm.
Activity alarm for the external reference clock. Indicates clock reference not detected.
6–19
Maintenance
6–20
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
Modulator module fault.
Typically indicates that the modulator module is missing or will not program. Ensure the modulator card is present and is properly seated. If the modulator card is properly seated, this could indicate a problem in the M&C card, or in the interface between the modulator and the M&C card. Another possible cause is the modulator firmware may be installed incorrectly or has a pin not making contact. Ensure the modulator firmware is correctly seated. Return the defective card for repair.
Modulator programming fault.
Indicates the modulator module has failed to program a current configuration parameter. If this fault occurs, contact EFData
Customer Support for assistance.
Modulator configuration fault.
Indicates the modulator module does not support a programmed configuration parameter. This fault typically occurs when the programmed configuration does not match the module hardware.
Ensure the programming of the modulator hardware matches the configuration parameters.
6.2.2.2.2 Demodulator Faults
Fault/Alarm
CARRIER DETECT
IF SYNTHESIZER
RX CLOCK SYN
I CHANNEL
Q CHANNEL
DESCRAMBLER
Possible Problem and Action
Carrier detect fault. Indicates the decoder is not locked.
This is the most common fault displayed in the modem. Any problem from the input data on the modulator end of the circuit to the output of the decoder can cause this alarm.
First, ensure the demodulator has an RF input at the proper frequency and power level. Ensure the demodulator data rate is properly programmed. Verify the frequency of the data transmitted from the modulator is within 100 PPM. Check the test points on the demodulator and decoder for the eye pattern, data, and clock to verify proper levels, activity, and phase
(Section 6.1.3).
Demodulator IF synthesizer fault.
Indicates the demodulator IF synthesizer is faulted. This fault is a hardware failure. Return the demodulator card for repair.
Receive data clock synthesizer fault.
Indicates a loss of lock on the reference of the demodulator clock recovery oscillator. This is a hardware failure fault. Return the demodulator card for repair.
Loss of activity in the I channel of the quadrature demodulator.
Typically indicates a problem in the modulator side of the circuit.
Check for proper RF input to the demodulator. If the input to the demodulator is correct, then the problem is in the baseband processing. Return the demodulator card for repair.
Loss of activity in the Q channel of the quadrature demodulator.
Follow the same procedure as for the I channel fault.
Descrambler alarm.
Indicates loss of activity in the descrambler.
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
BER THRESHOLD
MODULE
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
Maintenance
The preset BER threshold has been exceeded.
Setting of this alarm is done in the Configuration menu. This is an alarm based on the corrected BER reading on the front panel.
Demodulator module fault.
Typically indicates that the demodulator module is missing or will not program. Ensure the demodulator card is present and properly seated. If the card is properly seated, this could indicate a problem in the M&C card, or in the interface between the demodulator card and the M&C card. Return the defective card for repair.
Demodulator programming fault.
Indicates the demodulator module has failed to program a current configuration parameter. If this fault occurs, contact
EFData Customer Support assistance.
Demodulator configuration fault.
Indicates the demodulator module does not support a programmed configuration parameter. This fault typically occurs when the programmed configuration does not match the module hardware. Verify the programming of the demodulator hardware matches the configuration parameters.
Rev. 4 6–21
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6.2.2.2.3 TX Interface Faults
Fault/Alarm
TX DATA/AIS
TX CLOCK PLL
TX CLOCK ACT
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
Possible Problem and Action
Data or incoming AIS fault.
When AIS is selected in the Interface Configuration menu for TX data fault, the transmit interface fault TX data/AIS is monitoring an alarm condition of all 1s from customer data input to the modem. When data is selected in the Interface Configuration menu for TX data fault, the TX interface fault TX data/AIS is monitoring an alarm condition of all 1s or 0s. This is referred to as a data-stable condition (the data is not transitioning). This fault indicates there is trouble in the chain sending data to the modem.
The modem passes this signal transparently and takes no other action. This indication is a monitor function only, and aids in isolating the trouble source in a system.
Transmitter phase-locked loop alarm.
Indicates the transmitter PLL is not locked to the reference of the interface transmit clock recovery oscillator. Return the interface card for repair. The interface will fall back to the internal clock when this alarm is active.
Activity detector alarm of the selected interface transmit clock.
Indicates the selected TX clock is not being detected. Check the signal of the selected TX clock source to verify the signal is present. The interface will fall back to the internal clock when this alarm is active.
Transmit interface programming fault.
Indicates the TX interface module has failed to program a current configuration parameter. If this fault occurs, contact EFData
Customer Support for assistance.
Transmit interface configuration fault.
Indicates the TX interface module does not support a programmed configuration parameter. This fault typically happens when the programmed configuration does not match the module hardware. Verify the programming of the TX interface hardware matches the configuration parameters.
6–22 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Maintenance
6.2.2.2.4 RX Interface Faults
Fault/Alarm Possible Problem and Action
BUFFER UNDERFLOW Buffer underflow alarm.
BUFFER OVERFLOW
Indicates the plesiochronous buffer has underflowed. Buffer underflow is normally a momentary fault (there are clock problems if this is continuously present). This fault is included in this section to be consistent with the fault reporting system and correctly registered in the stored fault memory. The time and date of the first 10 receive buffer underflow faults are stored in batterybacked memory as an aid to troubleshooting. The interval between stored overflow/underflow events can be used to determine relative clock accuracies.
Buffer overflow alarm.
RX DATA/AIS
FRAME BER
Indicates the plesiochronous buffer has overflowed. The problems and actions in the buffer underflow section apply to this alarm.
Data or incoming AIS fault.
The data monitored for RX data is coming from the satellite.
When the AIS is selected for RX Data Fault in the Interface
Configuration menu, the RX data/AIS is monitoring an alarm condition of all 1s from the satellite. When data is selected for RX data fault in the Interface Configuration menu, the RX data/AIS is monitoring a fault condition of all 1s or 0s. This is referred to as a data-stable condition (meaning the data is not transitioning). The alarm indicates trouble in receiving data from the satellite. The indication is a monitor function only to help isolate the source of trouble in a system.
The receive decoded error rate has exceeded 1.0
-3 over a
60-second period measured on the framing bits.
BUFFER CLK PLL
BUFFER CLK ACT
DEMUX_LOCK
This is defined as a major receive fault by INTELSAT specifications IESS-308. In a redundant system, a switchover will be attempted.
Buffer clock phase-locked-loop fault.
The buffer synthesizer is the wrong frequency or will not lock.
Ensure the selected buffer clock source is at the proper frequency and level. If the fault continues, return the interface card for repair.
Activity detector alarm of the selected interface receive clock.
The interface will fall back to the internal clock when this alarm is active.
Demultiplexer synchronization lock fault.
This fault means that the demultiplexer is unable to maintain valid frame and multiframe alignment. The usual cause is invalid or absent receive data. This is a major fault. This fault will occur when no carrier is present, but will probably never occur with a correct signal.
Rev. 4 6–23
Maintenance
RX 2047 LOCK
BUFFER FULL
PROGRAMMING
CONFIGURATION
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
RX 2047 lock alarm.
Indicates the RX 2047 data test pattern is not being received by the decoder. This probably indicates the transmitter is not set correctly.
Buffer full alarm.
Indicates the buffer is less than 10% or greater than 90% full.
Receive interface programming fault.
Indicates the RX interface module has failed to program a current configuration parameter. If this fault occurs, contact
EFData Customer Support for assistance.
Receive interface configuration fault.
Indicates the RX interface module does not support a programmed configuration parameter. This fault typically occurs when the programmed configuration does not match the module hardware. Ensure the programming of the RX interface hardware matches the configuration parameters. Also, verify all jumpers have been set correctly for currently programmed configuration parameters.
6–24 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Maintenance
6.2.2.2.5 Common Equipment Faults
Fault/Alarm
BATTERY/CLOCK
-12 VOLT SUPPLY
+12 VOLT SUPPLY
+5 VOLT SUPPLY
-5 VOLT SUPPLY
CONTROLLER
INTERFACE
Possible Problem and Action
M&C battery voltage or clock fault.
Indicates a low voltage in the memory battery. Typically this will be active when a modem has been hard reset, the firmware has been changed, and the modem is first turned on. If the fault occurs without a firmware change or hard reset of the modem, replace the display/M&C card.
-12 VDC power supply fault.
Indicates a high or low voltage condition. Level is
±
5%. Check for a short on the -12 VDC line from the power supply or on any of the plug-in boards. Check TP2 on the display/M&C card to verify the proper -12 VDC monitor voltage (1.06 VDC). If this voltage is not correct, it will verify that the -12 VDC supply is not at the proper level.
Try isolating the fault to a single board. If removing each of the boards does not fix the problem, then the power supply is faulted.
Return the faulty plug-in board or replace the chassis power supply.
+12 VDC power supply fault.
Use the same procedure as with -12V fault. To verify the +12 VDC power supply voltage, check TP4 on the display/M&C card. A voltage of 3.81 VDC will be monitored when the +12 VDC is at the proper level.
+5 VDC power supply fault.
Use the same procedure as with a -12 VDC fault. The +5 VDC supply requires a minimum load of 1A. This is accomplished with the display/M&C card and one other card being plugged into the chassis. To verify the +5 VDC power supply voltage, check TP5 on the display/M&C card. A voltage of 2.5 VDC will be monitored when the +5 VDC is at the proper level.
-5 VDC power supply fault.
To verify the -5 VDC power supply voltage, check TP3 on the display/M&C card. A voltage of 2.03 VDC will be monitored when the
-5 VDC is at the proper level.
Controller fault.
Indicates a loss of power in the M&C card. Typically indicates the controller has gone through a power on-off cycle.
Interface module fault.
Indicates a problem in programming the interface card. Ensure the interface card is present and properly seated. If the card is properly seated, this could indicate a problem in the M&C card or in the interface between the interface card and M&C card. Return the defective card for repair.
Rev. 4 6–25
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
6.2.2.2.6 Backward Alarms
Fault/Alarm
BW ALARM RX4
BW ALARM RX3
BW ALARM RX2
BW ALARM RX1
BW ALARM TX4
BW ALARM TX3
BW ALARM TX2
BW ALARM TX1
Possible Problem and Action
Receive backward alarm #4.
The distant end of the link is sending Backward Alarm #4. This indicates trouble at the distant end, which may be a result of improper transmission at the near end of the link. The modem will signal this event by setting the deferred maintenance alarm (open collector). This is essentially a monitor function so the modem reports and records the event, but takes no other action. Refer to Chapter 2 for the backward alarm theory of operation. If the user does not wish to monitor the backward alarm faults, the backward alarm inputs must be grounded at the breakout panel. Refer to the B141-1 Breakout Panel Installation
and Operation Manual for breakout panel pinouts.
Receive backward alarm #3.
Refer to BW alarm RX 4 for details.
Receive backward alarm #2.
Refer to BW alarm RX 4 for details.
Receive backward alarm #1.
Refer to BW alarm RX 4 for details.
Transmit backward alarm #4.
The modem is being instructed to send backward alarm #4 to the distant end of the link. This is controlled by wiring the backward alarm inputs of the modem to the Demod fault relay and/or other fault outputs in the receive system (see IESS-308 for clarification). The simplest implementation for single destination service is to wire the Demod fault relay between ground and the four backward alarm inputs (see
Chapter 2 for clarification). This sends all four backward alarms in the event of any major (prompt) receive fault. This particular alarm is transmitted, reported, and recorded, but the modem takes no other action. In most cases, this will be sent due to some receive problem with the modem, so a real fault will probably be occurring if backward alarms are being sent. The transmit backward alarms are a symptom of trouble, not a cause.
Transmit backward alarm #3.
Refer to BW alarm TX 4 for details.
Transmit backward alarm #2.
Refer to BW alarm TX 4 for details.
Transmit backward alarm #1.
Refer to BW alarm TX 4 for details.
6–26 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Maintenance
6.3 Module Replacement
The modem consists of plug-in cards that can be easily replaced. Card ejectors are provided for ease in removing the modulator, demodulator, and interface PCBs. To replace the display/M&C PCB on the modem front panel, remove the six mounting screws and connector.
The power supply is attached to the modem chassis. For repair of the power supply module, it is recommended that all the plug-in cards be removed before shipping the chassis, with the power supply, to EFData.
6.4 Module Identification
The modem cards each have an assembly number that is marked on the board, and the latest revision and serial numbers are stamped on the board. EFData tracks the hardware by assembly, revision, and serial number. Data rate dependent hardware is labeled with the associated symbol rate on a board label.
When replacing a plug-in module, care must be taken to ensure the proper daughter card is used. Refer to the individual sections on each module for location of the configuration identification. Refer to Chapter 1 for a list of part numbers and descriptions of various modules used in the modem.
6.5 Repacking for Shipment
Ship the modem and modem cards in the factory packaging. The three main cards can be shipped in the caddypack boxes in which they were received. The display/M&C card must be shipped in the modem chassis.
When a modem is being transported, it is required that the three main cards be removed and sent with the modem packed in the caddypack boxes. The display/M&C card must be installed in the modem chassis.
Note: Failure to comply with the repacking procedure will void the warranty.
Rev. 4 6–27
Maintenance SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
This page is intentionally left blank.
6–28 Rev. 4
Rev. 4
Appendix A.
A
OPTIONS
This appendix describes the Reed-Solomon Codec, Direct Broadcast Satellite (DBS), and
Digital Video Broadcast (DVB) options.
A.1 Reed-Solomon Codec
The Reed-Solomon Codec PCB (AS/4080) is a 6.75” x 7.50” daughter card that is located on the interface PCB. The interface card fits in the middle slot of the modem chassis.
The Reed-Solomon Codec works in conjunction with the Viterbi decoder, and includes additional framing, interleaving, and Codec processing to provide concatenated FEC and convolutional encoding and decoding (per IESS-308).
Refer to Figure A-1 for the Reed-Solomon Codec block diagram.
E
R
F
I
N
T
A
C
E
8 BIT
MUX DATA
DEMUX DATA
8 BIT
REED-SOLOMON
3 CHANNEL
SERIAL DATA
OVERHEAD
PROCESSOR
SERIAL DATA
MODULATOR
3 CHANNEL
DEMODULATOR
Figure A-1. Reed-Solomon Codec Block Diagram
A–1
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.1.1 Specifications
Reed-Solomon Codec word
Interleaver
Unique word insertion n = 208 k = 192 t = 8
Modified block interleaving, depth = 4
Per IESS-308 specification
Note: The Reed-Solomon implementation conforms to the INTELSAT IESS-308 specification.
A.1.2 Theory of Operation
The Reed-Solomon Codec card works in conjunction with the Viterbi decoder to provide concatenated convolutional encoding and decoding. The Reed-Solomon Codec block diagram is shown in Figure A-1. The two main sections of the Codec that will be discussed in this section are the Reed-Solomon encoder (Section A.1.2.1) and the Reed-
Solomon decoder (Section A.1.2.2).
A.1.2.1 Reed-Solomon Encoder
A block diagram of the Reed-Solomon encoder section is shown in Figure A-2. The
Reed-Solomon encoder section includes the following circuits:
•
8-bit parallel scrambler
•
Input FIFO
•
Reed-Solomon Codec
•
Output First In/First Out (FIFO)
•
Interleaver
•
8-bit parallel to 3-bit serial channel reformatter
MUXDAT
JP2
(SERIAL)
MUXCLK
JP2
PARALLEL
SYNCHRONOUS
SCRAMBLER
U5
INPUT
FIFO
U6
RS CODEC
(ENCODER
SECTION)
U6
UNIQUE WORD
INSERTION
U5
RAM
INTERLEAVER
U4
INTERLEAVER
ADDRESS
GENERATOR
U5
8 BIT PARALLEL
TO 3 CHANNEL
SERIAL
REFORMATTER
U5
JP2
JP2
TXSATDAT
TXSATCLK
RS TIMING
CONTROLLER
U5
Figure A-2. Reed-Solomon Encoder Section Block Diagram
A–2 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
The 8-bit wide data and clock come from the multiplexer on the interface PCB, and are sent to the Reed-Solomon encoder section through connector JP1. The data passes through an 8-bit parallel self-synchronizing scrambler in accordance with IESS-308
Rev. 6B specification. The host software allows the scrambler to be turned on or off at the front panel, as required by the user. If the scrambler is disabled, the data passes through the scrambler unaltered.
The data is passed along with dummy check bytes to the input FIFO in the Reed-
Solomon encoder chip. The term n - k = 2t is the total number of check bytes located at the end of each Reed-Solomon word. This is referred to as the Reed-Solomon overhead.
The Reed-Solomon outer Codec reads the data in blocks of n bytes, and corrects errors.
The letter n represents the total number of bytes in a given block of data out of the
Codec. The letter k represents the number of data bytes in a given block. The output data is passed to the output FIFO, and then to the block interleaver.
Errors from the Viterbi decoder usually occur in bursts. A block interleaver with a depth of 4 is used in accordance with the IESS-308 Rev. 6B specification. The interleaver has the effect of spreading out the errors across several blocks of data instead of concentrating the errors in a single block. Since there are fewer errors in any given block, there is a greater chance that the Reed-Solomon decoder can correct the errors on the receiving end of the satellite link. To allow the decoder to synchronize to the data, four unique words are inserted in the last two bytes of the last two RS words of the last RS page of the RS frame (Figure A-3).
Once the data passes through the interleaver, it is fed through a parallel/serial converter and sent back to the interface PCB. After further processing by the interface PCB, the data is sent to the modulator PCB.
Rev. 4 A–3
Options
1 RSWORD
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
RSWORD n BYTES kBYTES OF DATA
2t
CHECK BYTES
RSCODE
(n,k,t)
208, 192, 8
1 RS PAGE
RS FRAME
RS SYNC
PERIOD
A–4
UNIQUE WORDS GO
INTO THESE BYTES
Figure A-3. Reed-Solomon Codec Frame Format
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.1.2.2 Reed-Solomon Decoder
A block diagram of the Reed-Solomon decoder section is shown in Figure A-4. The
Reed-Solomon decoder section includes the following circuits:
•
3-channel serial unique word corrolater
•
RAM interleaver
•
Input FIFO
•
Reed-Solomon decoder
•
Output FIFO
•
8-bit parallel descrambler
RXSATDAT JP2
(SERIAL)
RXSATCLK
JP2
3 CHANNEL
SERIAL
UNIQUE WORD
CORROLATER
U9
RAM
DEINTERLEAVER
U10
DEINTERLEAVER
ADDRESS
GENERATOR
U15
INPUT
FIFO
U16
RS CODEC
(DECODER
SECTION)
U16
OUTPUT
FIFO
U16
8 BIT PARALLEL JP2
DESCRAMBLER
JP2
DEMUXDAT
(SERIAL)
DEMUXCLK
U9
RS TIMING
CONTROLLER
U15
Figure A-4. Reed-Solomon Decoder Section Block Diagram
The three channels of serial data and the clock signals come from the demultiplexer on the interface PCB and are sent to the Reed-Solomon decoder section through connector
JP3.
The data is passed to a 3-channel serial corrolater which locates the unique words and reformats the data to 8 bits on the appropriate byte boundaries.
Because the data was block interleaved by the encoder, data must pass through a deinterleaver with the same depth as the interleaver used on the encoder. The de-interleaver is synchronized by the detection of the unique words which are placed at the end of each
RS frame by the interleaver on the encoder. Once the de-interleaver is synchronized to the incoming data, the data is reassembled into its original sequence in accordance with the IESS-308 Rev. 6B specification. The data is then sent to the input FIFO and on to the
Reed-Solomon decoder.
Rev. 4 A–5
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Refer to Figure A-3 for the Reed-Solomon frame format. The term n - k = 2t is the total number of check bytes appended to the end of the data. The outer Codec reads the data in blocks of n bytes, and recalculates the check bytes. If the recalculated check bytes do not match the check bytes received, the Codec makes the necessary corrections to the data within the data block. The letter n represents the total number of bytes in a given block of data out of the Codec. The letter k represents the number of data bytes in a given block. The terms k, n, and t will vary depending on the data rate being used. The Codec then sends only the corrected data to an output FIFO.
The data is sent through a self-synchronizing 8-bit parallel descrambler in accordance with the IESS-308 Rev. 6B specification. The descrambler converts the data back into the original data that the user intended to send. The synchronous descrambler is synchronized by the detection of the unique word at the end of each Reed-Solomon frame. The data is then sent to the interface PCB for further processing.
A–6 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.1.3 Installation
Installation instructions for the Reed-Solomon Codec PCB (AS/4080) include:
•
Unpacking and initial inspection
•
Tools required
•
Installation
A.1.3.1 Unpacking Instructions
CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by ESD.
Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or inserting
PCBs.
1. Remove Reed-Solomon PCB and mounting hardware from the cardboard caddypack and anti-static material.
2. Check packing list to ensure the shipment is complete.
3. Inspect the Reed-Solomon PCB for any shipping damage. Ensure all ICs are seated properly.
A.1.3.2 Tools Required
The following tool is required to install the Reed-Solomon Codec PCB:
Tool
Phillips
Screwdriver
Description
To remove and replace cross-point screws.
Rev. 4 A–7
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.1.3.3 Installation Procedure
Install the Reed-Solomon Codec PCB (AS/4080) as a daughter card on the interface PCB
(AS/3971-1 or -2) as follows:
Turn off power before installation. High current VDC is present. Failure to do so could result in damage to the modem components.
CAUTION
1. Open modem front door and turn off the power.
2. Remove interface PCB (middle board) from the modem.
3. Install the Reed-Solomon PCB to the interface PCB. Mate the male header connectors JP2, JP3, and JP1 on the Reed-Solomon PCB with the interface PCB female header connectors J2, J3, and J4, respectively. Refer to Figure A-5 for the connector and mounting hardware locations.
4. Align Reed-Solomon PCB standoffs with the interface PCB mounting holes.
Install the six mounting screws and washers.
CAUTION
The mounting hardware must be installed to provide proper grounding between the Reed-Solomon PCB and the interface PCB.
5. Re-install interface PCB to the modem.
6. After completing the above installation procedure, turn on the modem.
a.
If the Reed-Solomon option was installed properly, the interface option screen for the Utility Interface subsection will display a “+”.
b. For further information, see the operating instructions and front panel menus in Chapter 4.
A–8 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
JP2
JP3
JP4
MOUNTING HOLES (6)
R-S DECODER PCB
INTERFACE PCB
Figure A-5. Reed-Solomon Installation
R-S DECODER PCB
JP2
JP3
JP1
MOUNTING
SPACERS AND
HARDWARE (6)
Options
Rev. 4 A–9
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2 Direct Broadcast Satellite
This section describes the optional Direct Broadcast Satellite (DBS) operating mode for the SDM-9000.
As implemented on the SDM-9000, the DBS mode supports data rates up to
44.736 Mbit/s using a single FEC (Forward Error Correction) channel. Single channel implementation differs significantly from the INTELSAT specifications (for carriers greater than 10 Mbit/s) for commutating the data across three channels.
In addition, DBS mode employs the following features:
•
Special framing
•
Scrambling
•
Reed-Solomon coding
•
Code rate puncturing
DBS operation with the SDM-9000 is based on the European Broadcasting Union (EBU)
DVB specifications of DVB SB 5 (94) 5 and ETS 300 421. Both of these specifications describe channel coding, modulation, etc., for transmitting MPEG-2 (ISO/IEC 13818) coded television over a satellite link.
Figure A-6 shows the conceptual block diagrams for the transmit and receive processes of the SDM-9000 when configured for DBS operation.
Note: The IF physical interfaces and QPSK modulator are functionally equivalent to those used during INTELSAT operation, and will not be described here.
The blocks shown in Figure A-6 have special functionality when operating in DBS mode. Each block is described in the following sections.
A–10 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
DATA
CLOCK
SYNC
BASEBAND
PHYSICAL
INTERFACE and
DE-JITTER
FIFO
SYNC
DECODER
(Correlator)
2047 AND
AIS
GENERATORS
SYNC 1
INVERSION and
SCRAMBLER
REED-
SOLOMON
CODER
(Outer Coder)
A) TRANSMIT PROCESS
DEPTH 12
INTERLEAVER
K = 7
CONVOLUT.
ENCODER
PUNCTURING and
MAPPING
(Inner Coder)
I
Q
NYQUIST
FILTERS
(35% SRC)
TO QPSK
MODULATOR
FROM QPSK
DEMODULATOR
NYQUIST
FILTERS
(35% SRC)
I
Q
MAPPING and
DEPUNCTUR.
VITERBI
DECODER
(Inner Decoder)
SYNC
DECODER
(Correlator)
DEPTH 12
DEINTERLEAV.
REED-
SOLOMON
DECODER
(Outer Decoder)
DESCRAMBLE and
SYNC 1
INVERSION
DOPPLER
BUFFER
2047 and
AIS DETECT
B) RECEIVE PROCESS
BASEBAND
PHYSICAL
INTERFACE
DATA
CLOCK
SYNC
Figure A-6. Block Diagram of SDM-9000 Configured for DBS/DVB Operation
A.2.1 Requirements
This section covers the module types that are compatible with each option, and the minimum software requirements for the modem PCBs. The following options list the interface type and PCB assembly numbers.
The DBS option works in conjunction with the Viterbi decoder, and includes additional framing, interleaving, and Codec processing to provide:
•
Concatenated FEC
•
Convolutional encoding/decoding
This option can be factory or user installed. Refer to the following table for modem compatibility requirements.
Interface PCB
Display/M&C PCB
Modulator PCB
Demodulator PCB
DVB Reed-Solomon PCB
Type 2 or 3 (or greater)
AS/4477-22 PECL w/buffer
AS/4477-32 PECL w/ESC
AS/4477-21 ECL w/buffer
AS/4477-31 ECL w/ESC
AS/2305 Rev. C4 (or greater)
AS/3969
AS/3970-5 or AS/3970-6
AS/4524
Rev. 4 A–11
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2.2 Baseband Physical Interfaces
The baseband physical interface for the DBS mode is provided by the Emitter Coupled
Logic (ECL) or Positive Emitter Coupled Logic (PECL) interface boards installed in the
SDM-9000. Refer to Sections A.2.2.1 and A.2.2.2 for information about the respective interface boards.
Characteristics of the baseband physical interface are described in Section A.2.3.
Timing requirements for the baseband physical interface are presented in Section A.2.4.
A.2.2.1 ECL Physical Interface
The ECL interface uses MC10H115 differential line receivers and MC10H101 differential line drivers to provide the electrical interface to the SDM-9000. Figure A-7 shows a typical differential ECL receiver and driver diagram.
+ECL_IN
-ECL_IN
100
5
4
1 16
8 9
2
MC10H115
-5.2V
1 16
2
4
8 12
5
MC10H101
330 330
-5.2V
-5.2V
Figure A-7. Typical Differential ECL Receiver and Driver
-ECL_OUT
+ECL_OUT
A–12 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.2.2.2 PECL Physical Interface
The PECL interface uses the same interface devices as the ECL, but is referenced to the positive rail, as shown in Figure A-8. The electrical characteristics of both interface types are shown in Table A-1.
+PECL_IN
100
-PECL_IN
+5V
5
4
1 16
8 9
2
MC10H115
+5V
1 16
2
4
8 12
5
MC10H101
330 330
-PECL_OUT
+PECL_OUT
Figure A-8. Typical Differential PECL Receiver and Driver
Table A-1. Electrical Characteristics of ECL and PECL
Interface Types
ECL
PECL
Symbol
V
OH
V
OL
V
IH
V
IL
V
OH
V
OL
V
IH
V
IL
Parameter
Output High Voltage
Output Low Voltage
Input High Voltage
Input Low Voltage
Output High Voltage
Output Low Voltage
Input High Voltage
Input Low Voltage
Min
-1.02
-1.95
-1.17
-1.95
3.98
3.05
3.83
3.05
Max
-0.74
-1.60
-0.84
-1.48
4.26
3.40
4.16
3.52
Units
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Rev. 4 A–13
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2.3 DBS Baseband Interface
A.2.3.1 DBS TX Baseband Interface
As illustrated previously by Figure A-6, the data and sync inputs are first passed through a dejitter FIFO register to hand off the data to the stable transmit clock, and then passed to the SYNC 1 inversion and scrambler block.
The transmit DBS baseband interface accepts data in 204-byte packets in bit serial format that are composed of 188-byte MPEG-2 packets. In addition, 16 null bytes are included as place holders for Reed-Solomon overhead. Figure A-9 shows the packet arrangement.
SYNC
BYTE
204 BYTES
(1,632 BITS)
PAYLOAD (187 BYTES)
ZERO PADDING
16 BYTES
Figure A-9. DBS Mode Baseband Packet
Note: An additional sync input is used to indicate the position of the sync byte within the input stream.
A.2.3.2 DBS RX Baseband Interface
The receive DBS baseband interface takes data and sync pulses from the SYNC 1 inversion logic, and provides bit serial data and sync pulses in 204-byte packets
(1,632 bits) to the outside world.
A–14 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.2.4 Baseband Interface Requirements
A.2.4.1 Timing for Transmit Baseband Interface
A diagram of the timing for the transmit baseband interface is shown in Figure A-10.
Figure A-10. Timing for Transmit Baseband Interface
Parameters for TX baseband interface timing are presented in Table A-2.
Table A-2. TX Baseband Interface Timing
Parameter t su t h t cl t ch
Description
Setup time, DATA or SYNC to CLOCK
Hold time, CLOCK to DATA or SYNC invalid
CLOCK low duration
CLOCK high duration
Min
8 ns
2 ns
8 ns
8 ns
Note: SYNC is only required in DBS mode (204 -byte packets).
Rev. 4 A–15
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2.4.1.1 DBS Mode TX SYNC Pulse Timing
In DBS mode, a one clock-period-wide sync pulse must be supplied coincident with the first bit of the sync byte. However, it is not required that the MPEG-2 sync byte data
(0x47) be present, because the DBS sync-detect logic writes a new sync byte pattern upon receiving the sync pulse.
After the sync byte interval, 187 bytes (1,496 bits) of packet data, followed by 16 bytes
(128 bits) of zeros, are supplied to the modem. Refer to Figure A-11.
Figure A-11. DBS Mode TX SYNC Pulse Timing
A.2.4.2 Timing for Receive Baseband Interface
A diagram of the timing for the receive baseband interface is shown in Figure A-12.
Figure A-12. Timing for Receive Baseband Interface
A–16 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
Parameters for TX baseband interface timing are presented in Table A-3.
Table A-3. Receive Baseband Interface Timing
Min Parameter t cko t h t cl t ch
Description
Delay time, CLOCK to DATA or SYNC valid
Hold time, CLOCK to DATA or SYNC invalid
CLOCK low time
CLOCK high time
2 ns
8 ns
8 ns
Max
5 ns
A.2.4.2.1 DBS Mode Receive SYNC Pulse Timing
In DBS mode, a one clock-period-wide sync pulse is supplied coincident with the first bit of the sync byte (0x47). After the sync byte interval, 187 bytes (1,496 bits) of packet data, followed by 16 bytes (128 bits) of zeros, are output from the modem. Refer to
Figure A-13.
Figure A-13. DBS Mode Receive SYNC Pulse Timing
Receive packets that could not be corrected by the Reed-Solomon decoder are indicated with an extended sync pulse (two clock-periods-wide) as shown in Figure A-14.
Figure A-14. DBS Mode Receive with Extended SYNC
Rev. 4 A–17
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2.5 SYNC Decoder (Correlater)
In DBS mode, an external sync pulse provides the reference for the frame structure used throughout the transmission process. This external sync pulse must be provided coincident with the first bit of the MPEG-2 sync byte.
A.2.5.1 DBS Mode SYNC Decoder for 204-Byte Packets
A.2.5.1.1 TX Functions of the DBS Mode SYNC Decoder
During the transmission process, the DBS mode sync-detect logic ignores the sync byte data in the data packet. Instead, the external sync pulse is used. Upon receiving the external sync pulse, a new sync byte is written over the existing sync byte in the data packet. In addition, every eighth sync byte is inverted.
Use of the external sync pulse means the data packet is already correlated, because its framing structure is in a known relationship to the scrambler, the Reed-Solomon Codec, and the interleaver.
If the external sync pulse is not supplied, the condition is detected. In this case, a new framing structure is written over the 204-byte packets in no particular relationship to the original packets. This preservation of the framing structure allows the modem to operate correctly; however, the original MPEG-2 packets will be corrupted.
If the clock input is not supplied, the internal clock is used, and a new framing structure is supplied. The internal Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) generator fills the 187-byte payload with all 1s, and the last 16 bytes of the packet are filled with 0s.
A.2.5.1.2 RX Functions of the DBS Mode SYNC Decoder
During the reception process, the sync decoder always operates as a correlater because the frame structure must be determined entirely from the MPEG-2 sync bytes (no external sync pulse is available). Once the frame structure is detected, the de-interleaver,
Reed-Solomon decoder, and descrambler are synchronized to the 204-byte packets.
The sync decoder also recovers the
π
phase ambiguity of the QPSK demodulator that the
Viterbi decoder cannot detect.
A–18 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.2.6 SYNC 1 Inversion and Scrambler/Descrambler
In compliance with the DVB specifications, and to ensure adequate binary transitions, the payload data (187 bytes) in the transport packet is scrambled using a Pseudo Random
Binary Sequence (PRBS) generator.
The polynomial used for the PRBS is:
1 + X
14
+ X
15
The basic scrambler/descrambler is shown in Figure A-15.
INITIALIZATION SEQUENCE
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PRBS GENERATOR
ENABLE FROM
SYNC DETECT LOGIC
CLEAR/SCRAMBLED
DATA IN
Figure A-15. Scrambler/Descrambler
SCRAMBLED/
DESCRAMBLED
DATA OUT
At every eighth transport packet, the sequence “100101010000000” is loaded into the
PRBS registers. The inverted sync byte is used to initialize the PRBS generator.
Rev. 4 A–19
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2.6.1 DBS Mode (De)Scrambler for 204-Byte Packets
The DVB specifications require that the inverted sync byte detection be used to load the
PRBS generator every eight sync bytes, and that the PRBS generator run continuously until the next load (eight packet period).
The first bit at the output of the PRBS generator is applied to the first bit of the first byte following the inverted MPEG-2 sync byte (i.e., 0xB8). To aid other synchronization functions during the MPEG-2 sync bytes of the subsequent seven transport packets, the
PRBS generation continues, but its output is gated off, leaving these bytes unscrambled.
In DBS mode, however, there is an additional 16 bytes of padding at the end of each transport packet. The padding is reserved for Reed-Solomon (RS) overhead. (To be compatible with the DVB specification, the PRBS generator must be halted and the scrambler disabled during these 16 padding bytes.) The period of the PRBS generator for
DBS mode is:
PERIOD
=
8 PACKETS
∗
204 BYTES
PACKET
−
16 PAD BYTES
PACKET
−
1 INVERTED SYNC BYTE
=
1503 BYTES
Figure A-16 illustrates the DBS scrambler sequence.
204 BYTES
(1,632 BITS)
PAYLOAD (187 BYTES) DBS PACKET STREAM
ZERO PADDING
16 BYTES
SYNC 1
BYTE
PRBS LOAD
SCRAMBLER ENABLE
ZERO PADDING
16 BYTES
SYNC 2
BYTE
PRBS CLOCK ENABLE
SCRAMBLED
DBS PACKET STREAM
ZERO PADDING
16 BYTES
SYNC 1
BYTE
SCRAMBLED PAYLOAD (187 BYTES)
ZERO PADDING
16 BYTES
SYNC 2
BYTE
Figure A-16. DBS Scrambler Sequence
Note: The scrambler and the descrambler work in the same way, except that scrambled data is input and descrambled data is output.
A–20 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.2.7 Reed-Solomon Coder/Decoder
The Reed-Solomon coder receives scrambled data packets in byte serial format.
RS(204,188,8) shortened code—from the original RS(255,239,8) code—is applied to each scrambled transport packet (188 bytes) to generate an error-protected packet. Refer to Figure A-17 for the packet arrangement.
SYNC
BYTE
204 BYTES
(1,632 BITS)
SCRAMBLED PAYLOAD (187 BYTES)
RS(204,188,8)
16 BYTES
Figure A-17.
Reed-
Solomon RS(204,188,8) Error-Protected Packet
Note: RS coding is also applied to the non-inverted or inverted packet sync byte.
The shortened Reed-Solomon code is implemented by adding 51 bytes, all set to zero, to the information bytes at the input of a (255,239) encoder. These bytes are discarded after the encoding procedure.
The code and field generator polynomials are shown below.
Code Generator Polynomial: g(x) = (x +
α 0
) (x +
α 1
) (x +
α 2
)
…
(x +
α 15
)
Field Generator Polynomial: p(x) = x8 + x4 + x3 + x2 + 1
Rev. 4 A–21
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2.7.1 DBS Mode Check Byte Framing for 204-Byte Packets
When operating in DBS transmit mode, the 16 padding bytes are replaced with the 16
Reed-Solomon check bytes. The DBS mode allows a 1-for-1 byte replacement in the RS coder; therefore, no rate exchange is required. The 204-byte RS error-protected packet is then sent to the depth 12 interleaver.
Conversely, the DBS receive mode works by correcting byte errors in the first 188 bytes of the error-protected packet and replacing the 16 check bytes with 0s.
A–22 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.2.8 Depth 12 Interleaver/De-interleaver
Conceptually, the interleaver is composed of I = 12 branches, cyclically connected to the input byte stream by the input switch. Each branch is a FIFO shift register, with depth = 17 x branch index. The cells of the FIFO contain 1 byte, and the input and output branches are synchronized. For synchronization purposes, the sync bytes and inverted sync bytes are always routed in branch 0 of the interleaver, corresponding to a null delay.
The de-interleaver is similar in principle to the interleaver, but the branch indexes are reversed (i.e., branch 0 corresponds to the longest delay). De-interleaver synchronization is accomplished by routing the first recognized sync byte to branch 0.
Figure A-18 shows the interleaver/de-interleaver block diagram.
SYNC BYTE ROUTE
0 0
11
1
17
2
17x2
3
17x3
2
1
3
•
•
•
11
17x11
17 BYTE FIFO SHIFT REGISTER
INTERLEAVER
0
11
8
17x3
9
17x2
10
17
SYNC BYTE ROUTE
17x11
•
•
•
0
8
9
10
11
DE-INTERLEAVER
Figure A-18. Interleaver/De-interleaver
Rev. 4 A–23
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
An interleaved frame is generated by applying convolutional interleaving
(with depth I = 12) to the error-corrected packets.
Figure A-19 shows the interleaved frame structure.
SYNC 1 or
SYNC n
203 BYTES
SYNC 1 or
SYNC n
INTERLEAVING DEPTH I = 12
203 BYTES
Figure A-19. Interleaved Frame Structure
The interleaved frame is composed of overlapping error-protected packets delimited by inverted or non-inverted MPEG-2 sync bytes, preserving the periodicity of 204 bytes.
A–24 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.2.9 Inner Coder/Decoder
The transmit convolutional coder is a standard k = 7, rate 1/2 (G1 = 171, G2 = 133), followed by a programmable puncturing unit. Code rates supported are 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8.
A.2.9.1 Punctured Operation
The DVB puncturing scheme differs from that specified by IESS-308 (INTELSAT), and is shown in Figure A-20.
RATE 1/2
CONVOLUTIONAL
ENCODED DATA
X
Y
G1(1)
G2(1)
G1(2)
G2(2)
G1(3)
G2(3)
I
RATE 3/4 ENCODED
PUNCTURED CHANNEL
DATA
Q
G1(1) G2(2)
G2(1) G1(3)
A) RATE 3/4 PUNCTURE PATTERN
RATE1/2
CONVOLUTIONAL
ENCODED DATA
X
Y
G1(1)
G2(1)
G1(2)
G2(2)
G1(3)
G2(3)
G1(4)
G2(4)
G1(5)
G2(5)
G1(6)
G2(6)
G1(7)
G2(7)
RATE 7/8 ENCODED
I
PUNCTURED CHANNEL
DATA
Q
G1(1)
G2(1)
G2(2) G2(4)
G2(3) G1(5)
B) RATE 7/8 PUNCTURE PATTERN
G2(6)
G1(7)
= PUNCTURED SYMBOL (DELETED)
Figure A-20. DVB Puncturing
Rev. 4 A–25
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
In punctured operation (rates 3/4 and 7/8), a rate exchange is required between the rate
1/2 convolutional encoded data and the encoded punctured channel data.
Note: The DVB specification also describes rate 2/3 and rate 5/6 puncturing, but the
SDM-9000 does not support these code rates at this time.
Table A-4 shows the ratios between the convolutional encoder’s clock and the symbol clock for each exchange rate.
Table A-4. Rate Exchange Ratios for DVB Puncturing
Rate Ratio
7/8
3/4
1/2
7:4
3:2
1:1
Comment
No symbols are punctured, therefore no rate exchange is required.
The reception process works by shuffling the encoded punctured channel data to the appropriate positions for the rate 1/2 Viterbi decoder. Null symbol indicators are inserted into the punctured symbol positions in the rate 1/2 data stream.
Again, for rates 3/4 and 7/8, a rate exchange is required for the symbol clock to Viterbi clock hand-off. For rate 1/2, no symbols are punctured, and therefore, no rate exchange is required.
A–26 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.2.9.2 Signal Space Mapping
DBS/DVB operation employs conventional Gray-coded QPSK modulation with absolute mapping (no differential coding). Bit mapping in the signal space is shown in
Figure A-21.
Q
I = 1
Q = 0
I = 0
Q = 0
I
I = 1
Q = 1
I = 0
Q = 1
Figure A-21. QPSK Constellation
Rev. 4 A–27
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2.10 Nyquist Filters
Prior to modulation, the I and Q baseband signals are passed through Nyquist filters exhibiting a square-root, raised-cosine transfer function with a 35% rolloff factor. The theoretical transfer function is defined by the following expression:
=
1 for f f
N
( 1
− α
)
=
1
+
2
1 sin
2 2
π f
N
f
N
−
α
| |
for f
N
(
1
− α ) ≤
| f
N
|
≤ f
N
(
1
+ α )
=
0 for f f
N
( 1
+ α
) where:
α =
.35
f
N
=
1
2 T
S
=
R
S
2 is the Nyquist frequency
The reception process uses Nyquist filters exhibiting the same transfer function as the transmission process (matched filters). The receiving Nyquist filters are incorporated directly after the QPSK demodulator. The I and Q outputs of these filters are digitized and mapped to 3-bit, soft-decision symbols for subsequent de-puncturing (if required) and Viterbi decoding.
A–28 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
A.2.11 DVB with Reed-Solomon BER (QPSK)
Table A-5 shows the DVB Reed-Solomon specifications for the E b
/N
0
required to achieve 10 -6 to 10 -10 BER for different configurations.
Table A-5. Reed-Solomon BER Data
Specification
BER 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10 -6
10 -7
3.7 dB
3.9 dB
10 -8 4.0 dB
10 -10 4.3 dB
4.7 dB
4.9 dB
5.1 dB
5.4 dB
5.4 dB
5.6 dB
5.8 dB
6.2 dB
Typical
BER 1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10 -6
10 -7
3.1 dB
3.2 dB
10 -8 3.3 dB
10 -10 3.6 dB
4.0 dB
4.1 dB
4.2 dB
4.5 dB
5.0 dB
5.2 dB
5.3 dB
5.5 dB
All values are for QPSK mode operation. Refer to Figure A-22 for the DVB
Reed-Solomon BER curves.
Options
Rev. 4 A–29
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
10
-8
10
-9
10
-10
10
-2
10
-3
10
-4
10
-5
1/2 Rate 3/4 Rate 7/8 Rate
10
-6
BER
10
-7
Specification
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
E b
/N
0
(dB)
8.0
9.0
10.0
Figure A-22. QPSK (1/2, 3/4, 7/8 Rates) with Reed-Solomon (DVB)
11.0
A–30 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Options
A.3 ESC 64 kbit/s Data Option
The two audio channels in the ESC data stream can be replaced with a single 64 kHz data channel.
The data is transmitted and received on the same connector pins which were used for audio. The data is electrically similar to the 8 kHz data channel (except for the data rate).
As with the 8 kHz channel, the data transitions on the falling edge of the clock, and is valid on the rising edge. Setup and hold times for the rising edge are 5 uS.
If byte alignment is required, the 8 kHz clock can be used. The first bit of data is valid with the first rising edge of the 64 kHz clock following the rising edge of the 8 kHz clock. The rising edge of the 8 kHz clock should occur within 5 uS of the falling edge of the 64 kHz clock.
The receive timing is identical to the transmit. Data transitions on the falling edge of the clock and is valid on the rising edge. If byte alignment is used, the rising edge of the first
64 kHz clock following the rising edge of the 8 kHz clock marks the first data bit.
Rev. 4 A–31
Options SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
This page is intentionally left blank.
A–32 Rev. 4
Rev. 4
B
Appendix B.
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
This appendix describes the remote control operation of the SDM-9000.
•
Firmware number: FW/4100-1F
•
Software version: 6.1.1
B.1 General
Remote controls and status information are transferred via an RS-485 (optional RS-232) serial communications link.
Commands and data are transferred on the remote control communications link as
US ASCII-encoded character strings.
The remote communications link is operated in a half-duplex mode.
Communications on the remote link are initiated by a remote controller or terminal. The modem never transmits data on the link unless it is commanded to do so.
B–1
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
B.2 Message Structure
The ASCII character format used requires 11 bits/character:
•
1 start bit
•
7 information bits
•
1 parity bit
•
2 stop bits
Messages on the remote link fall into the categories of commands and responses.
Commands are messages which are transmitted to a satellite modem, while responses are messages returned by a satellite modem in response to a command.
The general message structure is as follows:
•
Start Character
•
Device Address
•
Command/Response
•
End of Message Character
B.2.1 Start Character
A single character precedes all messages transmitted on the remote link. This character flags the start of a message. This character is:
•
•
“<” for commands
“>” for responses
B.2.2 Device Address
The device address is the address of the one satellite modem which is designated to receive a transmitted command, or which is responding to a command.
Valid device addresses are 1 to 3 characters long, and in the range of 1 to 255. Address 0 is reserved as a global address which simultaneously addresses all devices on a given communications link. Devices do not acknowledge global commands.
Each satellite modem which is connected to a common remote communications link must be assigned its own unique address. Addresses are software selectable at the modem, and must be in the range of 1 to 255.
B–2 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
B.2.3 Command/Responses
The command/response portion of the message contains a variable-length character sequence which conveys command and response data.
If a satellite modem receives a message addressed to it which does not match the established protocol or cannot be implemented, a negative acknowledgment message is sent in response. This message is:
•
> add/?ER1_parity error'cr''lf']
(Error message for received parity errors.)
•
>add/?ER2_invalid parameter'cr''lf']
(Error message for a recognized command which cannot be implemented or has parameters which are out of range.)
•
> add/?ER3_unrecognizable command'cr''lf']
(Error message for unrecognizable command or bad command syntax.)
•
>add/?ER4_modem in local mode'cr''lf']
(Modem in local error; send the REM command to go to remote mode.)
•
>add/?ER5_hard coded parameter'cr''lf']
(Error message indicating that the parameter is hardware dependent and may not be changed remotely.)
Note: “add” is used to indicate a valid 1 to 3 character device address in the range between 1 and 255.
B.2.4 End Character
Each message is ended with a single character which signals the end of the message:
•
•
“cr”
“]”
Carriage return character for commands
End bracket for responses
Rev. 4 B–3
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
B.3 Configuration Commands/Responses
B.3.1 Modulator
Modulator
Frequency
Command:
Response:
RF Output
(IF Output)
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Modulator
Rate Preset
Assignment
Command:
Response:
<add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
>add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
RF_OFF'cr''lf']
<add/MF_'cr'
>add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr''lf']
<add/RF_xxx'cr'
>add/RF_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/RF_'cr'
>add/RF_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/AMRx_'cr'
>add/AMRx_nnnnn_mmmmm.m
mm'cr''lf']
Modulator
Rate Preset
Selection
Command:
Response:
Status:
<add/SMRx_'cr'
>add/SMRx_'cr'
RF_OFF'cr''lf']
See MR command.
Modulator
Power
Offset
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Modulator
Output
Power Level
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/MPO_snn.n'cr'
>add/MPO_snn.n'cr''lf']
<add/MPO_'cr'
>add/MPO_snn.n'cr''lf']
<add/MOP_snn.n'cr'
>add/MOP_snn.n'cr''lf']
<add/MOP_'cr'
>add/MOP_snn.n'cr''lf']
Where: nnn.nnnn = Frequency in MHz, 50.0000 to 180.0000, in
2.5 kHz steps.
Note: When the modulator frequency is programmed, the RF output is switched OFF.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: x = A, B, C, or D (preset designator).
nnnnn = One of the following coder rates:
1/2 (QPSK 1/2)
3/4 (QPSK 3/4)
7/8 (QPSK 7/8)
16Q34 (16QAM 3/4)
16Q78 (16QAM 7/8)
8P23 (8PSK 2/3)
8P56 (8PSK 5/6)
N/A (Not Assigned) mmmmm.mmm = Data rate in kHz.
Note: If the filter is calibrated for the Reed-Solomon, '+RS' will be appended to the code rate. Example: 3/4+RS_44736.0.
Where: x = A, B, C, or D (preset designator).
Notes:
1. Setting the modulator rate turns OFF the RF transmitter.
2. If the filter is calibrated for the Reed-Solomon, '+RS' will be appended to the code rate. Example:
3/4+RS_44736.0.
Where: snn.n = +40.0 to -40.0, in 0.1 dB increments.
Note: The modulator power offset is added to the nominal power level to adjust the transmit power range.
Where: snn.n = -20.0 to +5.0, in 0.1 steps (nominal range in dBm).
Note: The nominal power range is modified relative to the value specified by the modulator power offset (MPO_).
B–4 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Differential
Encoder
Enable
Modulator
Reference
Clock
Reed-
Solomon
Encoder
Enable
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/DENC_xxx'cr'
>add/DENC_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/DENC_'cr'
>add/DENC_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/MRC_xxxxx'cr'
>add/MRC_xxxxx'cr''lf']
<add/MRC_'cr'
>add/MRC_xxxxx'cr''lf']
<add/RSEN_xxx'cr'
>add/RSEN_xxx'cr'
RF_OFF'cr''lf']
<add/RSEN_'cr'
>add/RSEN_xxx'cr''lf']
Modulator
Spectrum
Rotation
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/MSR_xxxx'cr'
>add/MSR_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/MSR_'cr'
>add/MSR_xxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Remote Control Operation
Where: xxxxx = INT, EXT5 (5 MHz), EXT10 (10 MHz), or
EXT20 (20 MHz).
Note: If the High Stability Internal 5 MHz/External Divider
Option is not installed, only 'INT' will be allowed.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Notes:
1. Setting the Reed-Solomon Encoder turns OFF the RF transmitter.
2. If the Reed-Solomon Option is not installed, only OFF will be allowed.
Where: xxxx = NRM (normal spectrum) or INV (inverted spectrum).
B.3.2 Demodulator
Demodulato r Frequency
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Demodulato r Rate
Preset
Assignment
Status:
Response:
Demodulato r Rate
Preset
Selection
Differential
Decoder
Enable
Command:
Response:
Status:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/DF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
>add/DF_nnn.nnnn'cr''lf']
<add/DF_'cr'
>add/DF_nn.nnnn'cr''lf']
<add/ADRx_'cr'
>add/ADRx_nnnnn_mmmmm.mm
m'cr''lf']
<add/SDRx_'cr'
>add/SDRx_'cr''lf']
See DR command.
<add/DDEC_xxx'cr'
>add/DDEC_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/DDEC_'cr'
>add/DDEC_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: nnn.nnnn = Frequency in MHz, 50.0000 to 180.0000, in 2.5 kHz steps.
Where: x = A, B, C, or D (preset designator).
nnnnn = One of the following decoder rates:
1/2 (QPSK 1/2)
3/4 (QPSK 3/4)
7/8 (QPSK 7/8)
16Q34 (16QAM 3/4)
16Q78 (16QAM 7/8)
8P23 (8PSK 2/3)
8P56 (8PSK 5/6)
N/A (Not Assigned) mmmmm.mmm = Data rate in kHz.
Note: If the filter is calibrated for the Reed-Solomon, '+RS' will be appended to the code rate. Example: 3/4+RS_44736.0.
Where: x = A, B, C, or D (preset designator).
Note: If the filter is calibrated for the Reed-Solomon, '+RS' will be appended to the code rate. Example: 3/4+RS_44736.0.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Rev. 4 B–5
Remote Control Operation
RF
Loopback
IF
Loopback
Bit Error
Rate
Threshold
Reed-
Solomon
Decoder
Enable
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Sweep
Width
Range
Demodulato r Spectrum
Rotation
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/RFL_xxx'cr'
>add/RFL_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/RFL_'cr'
>add/RFL_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/IFL_xxx'cr'
>add/IFL_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/IFL_'cr'
>add/IFL_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/BERT_xxxx'cr'
>add/BERT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/BERT_'cr'
>add/BERT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/RSDE_xxx'cr'
>add/RSDE_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/RSDE_'cr'
>add/RSDE_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/SWR_nnnnnn'cr'
>add/SWR_nnnnnn'cr''lf']
<add/SWR_'cr'
>add/SWR_nnnnnn'cr''lf']
<add/DSR_xxxx'cr'
>add/DSR_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/DSR_'cr'
>add/DSR_xxxx'cr''lf']
B.3.3 Interface
Transmit
Clock
Phase
External
Reference
Frequency
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Buffer Clock Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/TCP_xxx'cr'
>add/TCP_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/TCP_'cr'
>add/TCP_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ERF_nnnnn.nnn'cr'
>add/ERF_nnnnn.nnn'cr''lf']
<add/ERF_'cr'
>add/ERF_nnnnn.nnn'cr''lf']
<add/BC_xxx'cr'
>add/BC_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/BC_'cr'
>add/BC_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface
Buffer Size
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/IBS_nn'cr'
>add/IBS_nn'cr''lf']
<add/IBS_'cr'
>add/IBS_nn'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Where: xxxx = NONE or 1 -n (where n = 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8
[exponent of threshold]).
Where: xxx = ON, OFF, or CORR_OFF.
Note: If the Reed-Solomon Option is not installed, only 'OFF' will be allowed.
Where: nnnnn = 0 to 120000, in 1 Hz steps.
Where: xxxx = NRM (normal spectrum) or INV (inverted spectrum).
Where: xxx = NRM (normal clock phasing) or INV (inverted clock phasing).
Where: nnnnn.nnn = 1544.000 to 51840.000 (steps of 8 kHz if data rate is under or equal to 20000.0 kbit/s or at data rate).
Where: xxx = INT (internal SCT clock), EXT (external TX terrestrial clock), SAT (receive satellite clock), or REF (external reference clock).
Note: If the OPERATION MODE is set for RX_ONLY (non-
G.703 interface only), 'INT' will not be allowed.
Where: nn = 0 to 32 (in 2 millisecond steps).
B–6 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Interface
Buffer
Center
Receive
Clock
Phase
Baseband
Loopback
Interface
Loopback
Interface
Loop
Timing
Command:
Response:
Interface
Coding
Format
Transmit
Interface
Coding
Format
Receive
Scrambler
Enable
Descramble r Enable
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Transmit
Data Fault
Receive
Data Fault
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/IBC_'cr'
>add/IBC_'cr''lf']
<add/RCP_xxx'cr'
>add/RCP_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/RCP_'cr'
>add/RCP_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/BBL_xxx'cr'
>add/BBL_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/BBL_'cr'
>add/BBL_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ILB_xxx'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ILB_'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ILT_xxx'cr'
>add/ILT_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ILT_'cr'
>add/ILT_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ICFT_xxxx'cr'
>add/ICFT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/ICFT_'cr'
>add/ICFT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/ICFR_xxxx'cr'
>add/ICFR_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/ICFR_'cr'
>add/ICFR_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/SE_xxx'cr'
>add/SE_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/SE_'cr'
>add/SE_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/DE_xxx'cr'
>add/DE_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/DE_'cr'
>add/DE_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/TDF_xxxx'cr'
>add/TDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/TDF_'cr'
>add/TDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/RDF_xxxx'cr'
>add/RDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/RDF_'cr'
>add/RDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Remote Control Operation
Where: xxxx = NRM (normal clock phasing) or INV (inverted clock phasing).
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxxx = AMI, B3ZS, or HDB3.
Where: xxxx = AMI, B3ZS, or HDB3.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxxx = NONE, DATA, or AIS.
Where: xxxx = NONE, DATA, or AIS.
Rev. 4 B–7
Remote Control Operation
Interface
Substitute
Pattern
(Transmit
2047
Pattern)
Interface
Read Error
Select
(Receive
2047
Pattern)
Interface
Service
Channel
Level
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Interface
Transmit
Overhead
Type
Interface
Receive
Overhead
Type
Transmit
Data Phase
Receive
Data Phase
IDR
Backward
Alarm
Enable
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/ISP_xxx'cr'
>add/ISP_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ISP_'cr'
>add/ISP_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/IRE_xxx'cr'
>add/IRE_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/IRE_'cr'
>add/IRE_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ISCL_xxx_nnn'cr'
>add/ISCL_xxx_nnn'cr''lf']
<add/ISCL_xxx'cr'
>add/ISCL_xxx_nnn'cr''lf']
<add/ITOT_xxxx'cr'
>add/ITOT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/ITOT_'cr'
>add/ITOT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/IROT_xxxx'cr'
>add/IROT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/IROT_'cr'
>add/IROT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/TDP_xxxx'cr'
>add/TDP_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/TDP_'cr'
>add/TDP_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/RDP_xxxx'cr'
>add/RDP_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/RDP_'cr'
>add/RDP_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/BW_xxx_nnn'cr'
>add/BW_xxx_nnn'cr''lf']
<add/BW_xxx_'cr'
>add/BW_xxx_nnn'cr''lf']
Scrambler
Type
Descramble r Type
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/SCRT_xxxx'cr'
>add/SCRT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/SCRT_'cr'
>add/SCRT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/DSCT_xxxx'cr'
>add/DSCT_xxxx'cr''lf']
<add/DSCT_'cr'
>add/DSCT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Where: xxx = TX1, TX2, RX1, or RX2 (service channel designator).
nnn = -20 to +10, in steps of 1 (service channel level in dBm).
Where: xxxx = NONE or IDR.
Note: If the ESC Option is not installed, only 'NONE' will be allowed.
Where: xxxx = NONE or IDR.
Note: If the ESC Option is not installed, only 'NONE' will be allowed.
Where: xxxx = NRM (normal data phasing) or INV (inverted data phasing).
Where: xxxx = NRM (normal data phasing) or INV (inverted data phasing).
Where: xxx = TX1, TX2, TX3, TX4, RX1, RX2, RX3, or RX4
(backward alarm designator).
nnn = ON or OFF.
Where: xxxx = V.35, EFD, or IDR.
Where: xxxx = V.35, EFD, or IDR.
B–8 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Interface
Receive
Framing
Structure
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/IRFS_fffff_ssss'cr'
>add/IRFS_fffff_ssss'cr''lf']
<add/IRFS_fffff_ssss'cr'
>add/IRFS_fffff_ssss'cr''lf']
Remote Control Operation
Where: fffff = 6312, 8448, 32064, 34368, 44736, or 51840 (frame type).
ssss = NONE, G704, G742, G743, G745, G747, G751,
G752, G753, or STS1 (framing).
Notes:
1. Valid 6312 frame structures are NONE, G704, G743, and G747.
2. Valid 8448 frame structures are NONE, G704, G742, and G745.
3. Valid 32064 frame structures are NONE and G752.
4. Valid 34368 frame structures are NONE, G751, and
G753.
5. Valid 44736 frame structures are NONE and G752.
6. Valid 51840 frame structures are NONE and STS1.
B.3.4 System
Time of Day Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Date Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Remote Command:
Response:
<add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr'
>add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr''lf']
<add/TIME_'cr'
>add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr''lf']
<add/DATE_mm/dd/yy'cr'
>add/DATE_mm/dd/yy'cr''lf']
<add/DATE_'cr'
>add/DATE_mm/dd/yy'cr''lf']
<add/REM_'cr'
>add/REM_'cr''lf']
Clear
Stored
Faults
Modem
Operation
Mode
Command:
Response:
<add/CLSF_'cr'
>add/CLSF_'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
<add/MOM_xxxxxxx'cr'
>add/MOM_xxxxxxx'cr''lf']
<add/MOM_'cr'
>add/MOM_xxxxxxx'cr''lf']
System
Modem
Type
Save
Modem
Config.
Recall
Modem
Config.
Command:
Response:
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/SMT_xxxxxxxx'cr'
>add/SMT_xxxxxxxx'cr''lf']
<add/SMT_'cr'
>add/SMT_xxxxxxx'cr''lf']
<add/SMC_n'cr'
>add/SMC_n'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RMC_n'cr'
>add/RMC_n'cr''lf']
Where: hh = 1 to 12 (hours).
mm = 00 to 59 (minutes).
xx = AM or PM.
Where: mm = 1 to 12 (month).
dd = 1 to 31 (day).
yy = 00 to 99 (year).
The Remote command configures the modem for remote operation. The modem will respond to any status request at any time. However, the modem must be in Remote Mode to change configuration parameters.
This command is used to clear all stored faults logged by the modem.
Where: xxxxxxx = TX_ONLY, RX_ONLY, or DUPLEX.
This command configures the modem for simplex or duplex operation modes. When transmit-only mode is selected, receive faults are inhibited. When receive-only mode is selected, transmit faults are inhibited.
Where: x = INTELSAT, DBS, or N5500.
Where: n = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (stored configuration number).
Where: n = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 (stored configuration number).
Rev. 4 B–9
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
B.4 Status Commands/Responses
B.4.1 Configuration
Modulator
Config.
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/MCS_'cr'
>add/MCS_'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm'cr'
AMRA_nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm'cr'
AMRB_nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm'cr'
AMRC_nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm'cr'
AMRD_nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
DENC_xxx'cr'
COM_xxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MRC_xxx'cr'
RSEN_xxx'cr''lf']
RF Output (ON/OFF)
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Preset 'A' Assignment
Preset 'B' Assignment
Preset 'C' Assignment
Preset 'D' Assignment
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Differential Encoder (ON/OFF)
Carrier Only Mode (ON/OFF)
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Reference Clock
Reed-Solomon Encoder (ON/OFF)
The Modulator Configuration Status command causes a block of data to be returned by the addressed modem. The block of data reflects the current configuration status of the modulator module. Additional configuration status of new options and features will always be appended to the end.
B–10 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
Modulator/
Coder
Config.
Program
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/ MCP_'cr'
SMT_xxxxxx'cr'
ITOT_xxxx'cr'
MOM_xxxxxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
DENC_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
BBL_xxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILT_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISCL_TX1_nnn'cr'
ISCL_TX2_nnn'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
MRC_xxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
RSEN_xxx'cr'
BW_TX1_nnn'cr'
BW_TX2_nnn'cr'
BW_TX3_nnn'cr'
BW_TX4_nnn'cr'
SCRT_xxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
System Modem Type
Interface Transmit Overhead Type
Modem Operation Mode
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Differential Encoder (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Baseband Loopback
Interface Loopback
Interface Loop Timing
Interface Coding Format Transmit
Interface Substitution Pattern (TX 2047)
Transmit Data Fault
Service Channel Level TX1
Service Channel Level TX2
Transmit Data Phase
Modulator Reference Clock
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Reed-Solomon Encoder (ON/OFF)
Backward Alarm Enable TX1
Backward Alarm Enable TX2
Backward Alarm Enable TX3
Backward Alarm Enable TX4
Scrambler Type
RF Output (ON/OFF)
This command is used by the EFData M:N protection switch to collect information that is necessary to configure back-up modems. Because this command (content and/or order) can be changed at any time by EFData, it is advisable that other commands ('MCS_' and 'ICS_', or 'BCS_') be used for M&C systems.
Demodulato r Config.
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/DCS_'cr'
>add/DCS_'cr'
DF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
DR_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr'
ADRA_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr'
ADRB_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr'
ADRC_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr'
ADRD_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr'
DDEC_xxx'cr'
RFL_xxx'cr'
IFL_xxx'cr'
BERT_xxxx'cr'
DSR_xxx'cr'
RSDE_xxx'cr'
SWR_nnnnnn'cr''lf']
Demodulator Frequency
Demodulator Rate
Preset 'A' Assignment
Preset 'B' Assignment
Preset 'C' Assignment
Preset 'D' Assignment
Differential Decoder
RF Loopback
IF Loopback
BER Threshold
Demodulator Spectrum Rotation
Reed-Solomon Decoder
Sweep Width Range
The Demodulator Configuration Status command causes a block of data to be returned by the addressed modem. The block of data reflects the current configuration of the demod.
Additional configuration status of new options and features will always be appended to the end.
Rev. 4 B–11
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Demod/
Decoder
Config.
Program
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/DCP_'cr'
>add/DCP_'cr'
SMT_xxxxxx'cr'
IROT_xxxx'cr'
MOM_xxxxxxx'cr'
BERT_xxxx'cr'
DF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
DR_nnnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr'
DE_xxx'cr'
DDEC_xxx'cr'
RFL_xxx'cr'
IFL_xxx'cr'
ERF_nnnnn.nnn'cr'
BC_xxx'cr'
RCP_xxx'cr'
BBL_xxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILT_xxx'cr'
ICFR_xxxx'cr'
IRE_xxx'cr'
RDF_xxxx'cr'
ISCL_RX1_nnn'cr'
ISCL_RX2_nnn'cr'
RDP_xxxx'cr'
IBS_nn'cr'
DSR_xxx'cr'
RSDE_xxx'cr'
BW_RX1_nnn'cr'
BW_RX2_nnn'cr'
BW_RX3_nnn'cr'
BW_RX4_nnn'cr'
DSCT_xxxxxxx'cr'
IRFS_6312_ssss'cr'
IRFS_8448_ssss'cr'
IRFS_32064_ssss'cr'
IRFS_34368_ssss'cr'
IRFS_44736_ssss'cr'
IRFS_51840_ssss'cr'
SWR_nnnnnn'cr''lf']
System Modem Type
Interface Receive Overhead Type
Modem Operation Mode
BER Threshold
Demodulator Frequency
Demodulator Rate
Descrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Differential Decoder (ON/OFF)
RF Loopback (ON/OFF)
IF Loopback (ON/OFF)
External Reference Frequency
Buffer Clock
Receive Clock Phase
Baseband Loopback
Interface Loopback
Interface Loop Timing
Interface Coding Format Receive
Interface Read Error (RX 2047)
Receive Data Fault
Service Channel Level RX1
Service Channel Level RX2
Receive Data Phase
Interface Buffer Size
Demodulator Spectrum Rotation
Reed-Solomon Decoder (ON/OFF/CORR_OFF)
Backward Alarm Enable RX1
Backward Alarm Enable RX2
Backward Alarm Enable RX3
Backward Alarm Enable RX4
Descrambler Type
Interface Receive Frame Structure (6312)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (8448)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (32064)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (34368)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (44736)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (51840)
Sweep Width Range
This command is used by the EFData M:N protection switch to collect information that is necessary to configure back-up modems. Because this command (content and/or order) can be changed at any time by EFData, it is advisable that other commands ('DCS_' and 'ICS_', or 'BCS_') be used for M&C systems.
B–12 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Interface
Config.
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
ERF_nnnnn.nnn'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
RCP_xxx'cr'
BBL_xxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILT_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
ICFR_xxxx'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
DE_xxx'cr'
BC_xxx'cr'
IBS_nn'cr'
ITOT_xxxx'cr'
IROT_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
IRE_xxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
RDF_xxxx'cr'
ISCL_TX1_nnn'cr'
ISCL_TX2_nnn'cr'
ISCL_RX1_nnn'cr'
ISCL_RX2_nnn'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
RDP_xxxx'cr'
BW_TX1_nnn'cr'
BW_TX2_nnn'cr'
BW_TX3_nnn'cr'
BW_TX4_nnn'cr'
BW_RX1_nnn'cr'
BW_RX2_nnn'cr'
BW_RX3_nnn'cr'
BW_RX4_nnn'cr'
SCRT_xxxxxxx'cr'
DSCT_xxxxxxx'cr'
IRFS_6312_ssss'cr'
IRFS_8448_ssss'cr'
IRFS_32064_ssss'cr'
IRFS_34368_ssss'cr'
IRFS_44736_ssss'cr'
IRFS_51840_ssss'cr''lf']
Modem
Faults
Status
(Summary)
Command:
Response:
<add/MFS_'cr'
>add/MFS_'cr'
DMD_xxx'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
ITX_xxx'cr'
IRX_xxx'cr'
CEQ_xxx'cr'
BWAL_xxx'cr''lf']
Remote Control Operation
External Reference Frequency
Transmit Clock Phase
Receive Clock Phase
Baseband Loopback
Interface Loopback
Interface Loop Timing
Interface Coding Format Transmit
Interface Coding Format Receive
Scrambler Enable
Descrambler Enable
Buffer Clock (Source)
Interface Buffer Size
Interface Transmit Overhead Type
Interface Receive Overhead Type
Interface Substitution Pattern (TX 2047)
Interface Read Error (RX 2047)
Transmit Data Fault
Receive Data Fault
Service Channel Level TX1
Service Channel Level TX2
Service Channel Level RX1
Service Channel Level RX2
Transmit Data Phase
Receive Data Phase
Backward Alarm Enable TX1
Backward Alarm Enable TX2
Backward Alarm Enable TX3
Backward Alarm Enable TX4
Backward Alarm Enable RX1
Backward Alarm Enable RX2
Backward Alarm Enable RX3
Backward Alarm Enable RX4
Scrambler Type
Descrambler Type
Interface Receive Frame Structure (6312)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (8448)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (32064)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (34368)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (44736)
Interface Receive Frame Structure (51840)
The Interface Configuration Status command causes a block of data to be returned by the addressed modem. The block reflects the current configuration of the interface. Additional configuration status of new options and features will always be appended to the end.
Demodulator
Modulator
Interface Transmit Side
Interface Receive Side
Common Equipment
Backward Alarms
Rev. 4 B–13
Remote Control Operation
Modulator
Status
Command:
Response:
Demodulato r Status
Command:
Response:
Interface
Transmit
Side Status
Interface
Receive
Side Status
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/MS_'cr'
>add/MS_'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
SYN_xxx'cr'
DCA_xxx'cr'
DCS_xxx'cr'
ICH_xxx'cr'
QCH_xxx'cr'
AGC_xxx'cr'
SCT_xxx'cr'
EXT_xxx'cr'
PROG_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
<add/DS_'cr'
>add/DS_'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
CD_xxx'cr'
SYN_xxx'cr'
RCS_xxx'cr'
ICH_xxx'cr'
QCH_xxx'cr'
DSCR_xxx'cr'
BERT_xxx'cr'
PROG_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
<add/ITXS_'cr'
>add/ITXS_'cr'
TXD_xxx'cr'
PLL_xxx'cr'
CLK_xxx'cr'
PROG_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
<add/IRXS_'cr'
>add/IRXS_'cr'
UNFL_xxx'cr'
OVFL_xxx'cr'
RXD_xxx'cr'
FBER_xxx'cr'
CLK_xxx'cr'
PLL_xxx'cr'
DMUX_xxx'cr'
2047_xxx'cr'
BUFF_xxx'cr'
PROG_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
RF Output (ON/OFF) Actual Status, Not Config.
Module
IF Synthesizer
Data Clock Activity
Data Clock Synthesizer
I Channel
Q Channel
AGC Level
Internal SCT Synthesizer
External Reference Activity
Programming
Configuration
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
Demod Module
Carrier Detect
IF Synthesizer Lock
Receive Clock Synthesizer
I Channel
Q Channel
Descrambler
BER Threshold
Programming
Configuration
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
Transmit Data/AIS
Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock
Selected Transmit Clock Activity
Programming
Configuration
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
Buffer Underflow
Buffer Overflow
Receive Data Loss/AIS
Frame BER
Selected Buffer Clock Activity
Buffer Clock PLL Lock
Demux Lock
2047 Pattern Lock Detect
Buffer Full
Programming
Configuration
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
B–14 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Common
Equipment
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/CES_'cr'
>add/CES_'cr'
M&C_xxx'cr'
INT_xxx'cr'
BAT_xxx'cr'
+5_xxx'cr'
-5_xxx'cr'
+12_xxx'cr'
-12_xxx'cr'
MODE_xxxxxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
Interface
Alarms
(Backward
Alarm)
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/IAS_'cr'
>add/IAS_'cr'
TXBWA1_xxx'cr'
TXBWA2_xxx'cr'
TXBWA3_xxx'cr'
TXBWA4_xxx'cr'
RXBWA1_xxx'cr'
RXBWA2_xxx'cr'
RXBWA3_xxx'cr'
RXBWA4_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
B.4.2 Error Performance
Raw BER Command:
Response:
<add/RBER_'cr'
>add/RBER_xm.mE-ee'cr''lf']
Remote Control Operation
Monitor & Control Module
Data Interface Module
Battery/Clock
+5V Power Supply
-5V Power Supply
+12V Power Supply
-12V Power Supply
Mode (LOCAL or REMOTE)
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
The common equipment status command causes a block of data to be returned which indicates the status of the common equipment.
TX Backward Alarm 1
TX Backward Alarm 2
TX Backward Alarm 3
TX Backward Alarm 4
RX Backward Alarm 1
RX Backward Alarm 2
RX Backward Alarm 3
RX Backward Alarm 4
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
Where: x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the error rate is less than or greater than the returned value).
m.m = 1.0 to 9.9 (error rate mantissa).
ee = 1 to 99 (error rate exponent).
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the error rate has exceeded the computational resolution of the system.
2. 'No Data' is returned if the error rate cannot be calculated.
3. 'Sampling' is returned if not enough data is currently available to calculate the error rate.
Rev. 4 B–15
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Corrected
BER
Corrected
BER Log
Command:
Response:
<add/CBER_'cr'
>add/CBER_xm.mE-ee'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
Examples:
<add/CBEL_'cr'
>add/CBEL_t.t;s1, s2, s3...sn'cr''lf']
[No new compiled data from last poll]
>add/CBEL_1.0 'cr''lf']
[Momentary lock in 32 time intervals: 2.0E-3, 5.2E-7, 1.0E-10,
<1.0E-12]
>add/CBEL_1.0; ,,,,,,,2003, 5207,
1010, <1012,,,,,,,'cr''lf'
Where: x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the error rate is less than or greater than the returned value).
m.m = 1.0 to 9.9 (error rate mantissa).
ee = 1 to 99 (error rate exponent).
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the error rate has exceeded the computational resolution of the system.
2. 'No Data' is returned if the error rate cannot be calculated.
3. 'Sampling' is returned if not enough data is currently available to calculate the error rate.
Where: t.t = Time corrected BER samples in seconds ('0.1' to
'9.9').
; = At least one data point has been logged.
s1 to sn = Corrected BER samples in the format of xmmee (where: x = the optional data modifier '<' or '>'
[less than or greater than], mm = the corrected BER mantissa ['10' for 1.0 to '99' for 9.9], ee = the corrected
BER negative exponent ['00' to '99']).
Error data samples are compiled at the normal system rate indicated by the time parameter (t.t). The samples are stored in a 32-element FIFO. When the 'CBEL_' command is received, the samples in the FIFO are formatted and returned as indicated. The FIFO is then flushed. If the
FIFO becomes full, the oldest sample will be lost as the current sample is written.
Notes:
1. The most recent sample is represented by 'sn', while the least recent sample is represented by 's1'.
2. Data delimited by a comma (',') will be returned for all time intervals logged.
3. The optional data modifiers '<' and '>' are only present if the error rate exceeds the computational resolution of the system.
B–16 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
Interface
Read Error
Status
E b
/N
0
Status Command:
Response:
Modulator
Rate Status
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/IRES_'cr'
>add/IRES_tttt_xn.nE-ee'cr''lf']
Where: tttt = FRM (FRAME) or 2047 (indicates type of error being read).
x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the error rate is less than or greater than the returned value).
m.m = 1.0 to 9.9 (error rate mantissa).
ee = 1 to 99 (error rate exponent).
This command returns frame or 2047 error rate. The 'IRE_' configuration command is used to select reading of frame or 2047 errors.
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the error rate has exceeded the computational resolution of the system.
2. 'No Data' is returned if the error rate cannot be calculated.
3. 'Sampling' is returned if not enough data is currently available to calculate the error rate.
<add/EBN0_'cr'
>add/EBN0_xnn.ndB'cr''lf']
Where: x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the E b
/N
0
is less than or greater than the returned value).
nn.n = 1.0 to 99.9 (E b
/N
0
value).
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the
E b
/N
0
has exceeded the computational resolution of the system.
2. 'No Data' is returned if the E b
/N
0
cannot be calculated.
3. 'Sampling' is returned if not enough data is currently available to calculate the E b
/N
0
.
]
<add/MR_'cr'
>add/MR_nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm'cr''lf'
Where: nnnnn = One of the following coder rates:
1/2 (QPSK 1/2)
3/4 (QPSK 3/4)
7/8 (QPSK 7/8)
16Q34 (16QAM 3/4)
16Q78 (16QAM 7/8)
8P23 (8PSK 2/3)
8P56 (8PSK 5/6)
N/A (Not Assigned) mmmmm.mmm = Data rate in kHz.
Rev. 4 B–17
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Demodulato r Rate
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/DR_'cr'
>add/DR_nnnn_mmmm.mmm'cr''lf']
Receive
Signal Level
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/RSL_'cr'
>add/RSL_xsnndBm'cr''lf']
Where: nnnnn = One of the following decoder rates:
1/2 (QPSK 1/2)
3/4 (QPSK 3/4)
7/8 (QPSK 7/8)
16Q34 (16QAM 3/4)
16Q78 (16QAM 7/8)
8P23 (8PSK 2/3)
8P56 (8PSK 5/6)
N/A (Not Assigned) mmmmm.mmm = Data rate in kHz.
Where: x = < or > (data modifier to indicate that the receive signal level is less than or greater than the returned value).
s = + or - (receive signal level sign, plus or minus).
nn = 0 to 99 (receive signal level magnitude).
Notes:
1. The 'x' (< or >) parameter is only returned if the level has exceeded the computational resolution of the system.
2. 'No Data' is returned if the level cannot be calculated.
3. 'Sampling' is returned if not enough data is currently available to calculate the level.
Where: nn = 1 to 99 (relative to buffer depth).
Interface
Buffer Fill
Status
Current
Sweep
Value
Command:
Response:
<add/IBFS_'cr'
>add/IBFS_nn%'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/CSV_'cr'
>add/CSV_snnnnn'cr'
CD_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: s = + or - (sweep offset from center).
nnnnn = 0 to 60000.
xxx = OK or FLT (decoder lock status OK or FAULT).
This command returns the current sweep value and the decoder lock status.
B–18 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
B.5 Stored Faults
Information on stored faults is returned when requested. If no stored fault exists for a given fault number, the words “NO Fault” will be returned instead of the normal time/date status information.
The following symbols are commonly used to define the stored faults status commands:
•
# Fault number (0 to 9). “0” is the first fault stored.
• hh Hours in 24-hr. format.
• mm Minutes.
• ss Seconds.
•
MM Month.
•
DD Day.
•
YY Year.
Modulator
Stored
Faults
Demodulato r Stored
Faults
Command:
Response:
Interface
Transmit
Side Stored
Faults
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/MSF_#'cr'
>add/MSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YY'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
SYN_xxx'cr'
DCA_xxx'cr'
DCS_xxx'cr'
ICH_xxx'cr'
QCH_xxx'cr'
AGC_xxx'cr'
SCT_xxx'cr'
EXT_xxx'cr'
PROG_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/DSF_#'cr'
>add/DSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YY'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
CD_xxx'cr'
SYN_xxx'cr'
RCS_xxx'cr'
ICH_xxx'cr'
QCH_xxx'cr'
DSCR_xxx'cr'
BERT_xxx'cr'
PROG_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ITSF_#'cr'
>add/ITSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YY'cr'
TXD_xxx'cr'
PLL_xxx'cr'
CLK_xxx'cr'
PROG_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr''lf']
Module
IF Synthesizer
Data Clock Activity
Data Clock Synthesizer
I Channel
Q Channel
AGC Level
Internal SCT Synthesizer
External Reference Activity
Programming
Configuration
Demod Module
Carrier Detect
IF Synthesizer Lock
Receive Clock Synthesizer
I Channel
Q Channel
Descrambler
BER Threshold
Programming
Configuration
Transmit Data/AIS
Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock
Selected Transmit Clock Activity
Programming
Configuration
Rev. 4 B–19
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Interface
Receive
Side Stored
Faults
Common
Equipment
Stored
Faults
Interface
Alarms
Stored
Faults
Reed-
Solomon
Unavailable
Seconds
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/IRSF_#'cr'
>add/IRSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YY'cr'
UNFL_xxx'cr'
OVFL_xxx'cr'
RXD_xxx'cr'
FBER_xxx'cr'
CLK_xxx'cr'
PLL_xxx'cr'
DMUX_xxx'cr'
2047_xxx'cr'
BUFF_xxx'cr'
PROG_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr''lf']
Buffer Underflow
Buffer Overflow
Receive Data Loss/AIS
Frame BER
Selected Buffer Clock Activity
Buffer Clock PLL Lock
Demux Lock
2047 Pattern Lock Detect
Buffer Full
Programming
Configuration
<add/CSF_#'cr'
>add/CSF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YY'cr'
M&C_xxx'cr'
INT_xxx'cr'
BAT_xxx'cr'
+5_xxx'cr'
-5_xxx'cr'
+12_xxx'cr'
-12_xxx'cr''lf']
M&C Module
Data Interface Module
Battery/Clock
+5V Power Supply
-5V Power Supply
+12V Power Supply
-12V Power Supply
<add/IASF_#'cr'
>add/IASF_# hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YY'cr'
TXBWA1_xxx'cr'
TXBWA2_xxx'cr'
TXBWA3_xxx'cr'
TXBWA4_xxx'cr'
RXBWA1_xxx'cr'
RXBWA2_xxx'cr'
RXBWA3_xxx'cr'
RXBWA4_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/RSSF_#'cr'
>add/RSSF_# hh:mm:ss
MM/DD/YY'cr'
UNASEC_xxx'cr''lf']
TX Backward Alarm 1
TX Backward Alarm 2
TX Backward Alarm 3
TX Backward Alarm 4
RX Backward Alarm 1
RX Backward Alarm 2
RX Backward Alarm 3
RX Backward Alarm 4
Unavailable Seconds
B–20 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
Bulk
Consol.
Analog
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/BCAS_'cr'
>add/BCAS_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn'cr''lf']
This command is similar to the 'BCS_' command, but returns modem analog parameters. Additional status of new options and features will always be appended to the end.
Where: 'pn' is the last parameter returned.
Parameter
Number
1
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Receive Signal Level
(ref. 'RSL_' command).
Description p1 = xsnn, receive signal level in dBm.
2
3
Raw BER
(ref. 'RBER_' command).
Corrected BER
(ref. 'CBER_' command).
p2 = xm.m
p3 = xm.m
-ee
-ee .
.
4
5
Interface Read Error
(ref. 'IRES_' command).
E b
/N
0
(ref. 'EBN0_' command).
p4 = tttt_xm.m
p5 = xnn.n, E b
-ee
/N
0
.
in dB.
6
Buffer Fill Status
(ref. 'IBFS_' command).
p6 = nn%, buffer fill status.
Note: Parameters 2 through 6 are dependent on carrier acquisition. If the decoder is not locked, empty data blocks are returned
(,,,,,).
Rev. 4 B–21
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Bulk
Consol.
Status
Command:
Response:
<add/BCS_'cr'
>add/BCS_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn'cr''lf']
This command causes bulk modem status to be returned. To reduce the length of the response, message parameter data are returned without identifiers. However, parameter identification can be determined by order of return. Each status parameter is terminated with a ',' (comma), except for the last parameter, which has the standard message termination sequence ('cr''lf']). Most of the data returned is formatted the same way as the single command status request (refer to the appropriate portions of this document in preceding sections).
Where: 'pn' is the last parameter returned.
Parameter
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Modulator RF output
(ref. 'RF_' command).
Description p1 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Modulator IF frequency
(ref. 'MF_' command).
p2 = nnn.nnnn, IF frequency in MHz.
Modulator rate
(ref. 'MR_' command).
Modulator preset 'A' assignment
(ref. 'ARMA_' command).
p3 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
p4 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
Modulator preset 'B' assignment
(ref. 'ARMB_' command).
p5 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
Modulator preset 'C' assignment
(ref. 'ARMC_' command).
p6 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
p7 = nnnnn_mmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
Modulator preset 'D' assignment
(ref. 'ARMD_' command).
p8 = snn.n, modulator power offset in dB.
Modulator power offset
(ref. 'MPO_' command).
p9 = snn.n, transmitter output power level in dBm.
Modulator output power level
(ref. 'MOP_' command).
p10 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Differential encoder enable
(ref. 'DENC_' command).
Carrier only mode ON/OFF.
p11 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
12
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
(ref. 'MSR_' command).
p12 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
13
14
15
16
Modulator Reference Clock
(ref. 'MRC_' command).
Reed-Solomon Encoder Enable
(ref. 'RSEN_' command).
Demodulator IF frequency
(ref. 'DF_' command).
Demodulator rate
(ref. 'DR_' command).
p13 = n, where 'n' is '0' (INT), '1' (EXT5), '2' (EXT10), or
'3' (EXT20).
p14 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p15 = nnn.nnnn, demodulator IF frequency in MHz.
p16 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
B–22 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
Bulk Consol.
Status
(continued)
Parameter
Number
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Demodulator preset A assignment
(ref. 'ADRA_' command).
Demodulator preset B assignment
(ref. 'ADRB_' command).
Demodulator preset C assignment
(ref. 'ADRC_' command).
Demodulator preset D assignment
(ref. 'ADRD_' command).
Differential decoder enable
(ref. 'DDEC_' command).
RF loopback
(ref. 'RFL_' command).
IF loopback
(ref. 'IFL_' command).
BER threshold
(ref. 'BERT_' command).
Demodulator Spectrum Rotation
(ref. 'DSR_' command).
Reed-Solomon Decoder Enable
(ref. 'RSDE_' command).
External reference frequency
(ref. 'ERF_' command).
Transmit clock phase
(ref. 'TCP_' command).
Receive clock phase
(ref. 'RCP_' command).
Baseband loopback
(ref. 'BBL_' command).
Interface loopback
(ref. 'ILB_' command).
Interface loop timing
(ref. 'ILT_' command).
TX Interface coding format
(ref. 'ICFT_' command).
RX Interface coding format
(ref. 'ICFR_' command).
Scrambler enable
Description p17 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
p18 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
p19 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
p20 = nnnnn_mmmmm.mmm, code rate/data rate in kbit/s.
p21 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p22 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p23 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p24 = xxxx, BER threshold.
p25 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
p26 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF), '1' (ON), or '2' (CORR_OFF).
p27 = nnnnn.nnn, external reference frequency in kHz.
p28 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
p29 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
p30 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p31 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p32 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p33 = n, where 'n' is '0' (AMI), '1' (B3ZS), or '2' (HDB3).
p34 = n, where 'n' is '0' (AMI), '1' (B3ZS), or '2' (HDB3).
p35 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Rev. 4 B–23
Remote Control Operation
(ref. 'SE_' command).
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
B–24 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
Bulk Consol.
Status
(continued)
Parameter
Number
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Descrambler enable
(ref. 'DE_' command).
Description p36 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Buffer clock source
(ref. 'BC_' command).
p37 = n, where 'n' is '0' (INT), '1' (REF), '2' (EXT), '3' (SAT), or
'4' (HS).
Interface buffer size
(ref. 'IBS_' command).
Interface transmit overhead type
(ref. 'ITOT_' command).
p38 = nn, buffer size in milli-seconds.
p39 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE) or '1' (IDR).
Interface receive overhead type
(ref. 'IROT_' command).
p40 = n, where 'n' '0' (NONE) or '1' (IDR).
p41 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Interface substitution pattern
(ref. 'ISP_' command).
p42 = n, where 'n' is '0' (FRM/OFF) or '1' (2047/ON).
Interface read error
(ref. 'IRE_' command).
p43 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE), '1' (DATA), or '2' (AIS).
Transmit data fault
(ref. 'TDF_' command).
p44 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE), '1' (DATA), or '2' (AIS).
Receive data fault
(ref. 'RDF_' command).
p45 = nnn, service channel level in dBm.
Interface service channel TX1
(ref. 'ISCL_' command).
p46 = nnn, service channel level in dBm.
Interface service channel TX2
(ref. 'ISCL_' command).
p47 = nnn, service channel level in dBm.
Interface service channel RX1
(ref. 'ISCL_' command).
p48 = nnn, service channel level in dBm.
Interface service channel RX2
(ref. 'ISCL_' command).
p49 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
Transmit data phase
(ref. 'TDP_' command).
p50 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
Receive data phase
(ref. 'RDP_' command).
p51 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Backward Alarm enable TX1
(ref. 'BW_TX1_' command).
p52 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Backward Alarm enable TX2
(ref. 'BW_TX2_' command).
p53 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Backward Alarm enable TX3
(ref. 'BW_TX3_' command).
p54 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Backward Alarm enable TX4
(ref. 'BW_TX4_' command).
p55 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
Backward Alarm enable RX1
(ref. 'BW_RX1_' command).
Rev. 4 B–25
Remote Control Operation SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Bulk Consol.
Status
(continued)
Paramete r
Number
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Backward Alarm enable RX2
(ref. 'BW_RX2_' command).
Backward Alarm enable RX3
(ref. 'BW_RX3_' command).
Backward Alarm enable RX4
(ref. 'BW_RX4_' command).
Scrambler type
(ref. 'SCRT_' command).
Descrambler type
(ref. 'DSCT_' command).
Interface RX 6321 frame structure
(ref. 'IRFS_' command)
Interface RX 8448 frame structure
(ref. 'IRFS_' command).
Interface RX 32064 frame structure
(ref. 'IRFS_' command).
Interface RX 34368 frame structure
(ref. 'IRFS_' command).
Interface 44736 frame structure
(ref. 'IRFS_' command).
Interface 51840 frame structure
(ref. 'IRFS_' command).
Modem operation mode
(ref. 'MOM_' command).
MODEM REMOTE/LOCAL mode.
Description p56 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p57 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON).
p58 = n, where 'n' is '0' (OFF) or '1' (ON p59 = n, where 'n' is '0' (V.35), '1' (EFD), or '2' (IDR).
p60 = n, where 'n' is '0' (V.35), '1' (EFD), or '2' (IDR).
p61 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE), '1' (G704), '3' (G743), or
'5' (G747).
p62 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NONE), '1' (G704), '2' (G742), or
'4' (G745).
p63 = n, where n is '0' (NONE) or '7' (G752).
p64 = n, where n is '0' (NONE), '6' (G751), or '8' (G753).
p65 = n, where n is '0' (NONE) or '7' (G752).
p66 = n, where n is '0' (NONE) or '9' (STS1).
p67 = n, where n is '1' (TX_ONLY), '2' (RX_ONLY) or
'3' (DUPLEX).
p68 = n, where n is '0' (LOCAL) or '1' (REMOTE).
p69 = n, where n is '0' (INTELSAT), '1' (DBS), or '2' (N5500).
70
System modem type
(ref. 'SMT_' command).
Sweep width range
(ref. 'SWR_' command).
P70 = nnnnnn, sweep range in Hz.
B–26 Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
Bulk
Consol.
Status
Faults
:
Command
Response:
<add/BCSF_'cr'
>add/BCSF_abcdefghijklmno'cr''l f']
This command causes all modem fault status to be returned. To reduce the length of the response, fault status is embedded into the bit structure of the characters that are returned. Faults are indicated by a binary 1 in the designated bit position.
Where: Character 'a': Modulator fault status character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Modulator module fault.
Bit 4 = RF output status actual, not programmed status (1 =
ON, 0 = OFF).
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation (0 to 10) of the number of modulator stored faults.
Where: Character 'b': Modulator fault status character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = IF Synthesizer.
Bit 4 = Data Clock Activity.
Bit 3 = Data Clock Synthesizer.
Bit 2 = I Channel.
Bit 1 = Q Channel.
Bit 0 = AGC Level.
Where: Character 'c': Modulator fault status character 3.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Internal SCT Synthesizer.
Bit 4 = Programming.
Bit 3 = Configuration.
Bit 2 = External Reference Activity.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Where: Character 'd': Demodulator fault status character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Demod module fault.
Bit 4 = Carrier detect status (0 for decoder lock).
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation (0 to 10) of the number of demodulator stored faults.
Where: Character 'e': Demodulator fault status character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = IF Synthesizer Lock.
Bit 4 = Receive Clock Synthesizer.
Bit 3 = I Channel.
Bit 2 = Q Channel.
Bit 1 = Descrambler.
Bit 0 = BER threshold.
Where: Character 'f': Demodulator fault status character 3.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Programming.
Bit 4 = Configuration.
Bit 3 = reserved.
Bit 2 = reserved.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Where: Character 'g': Interface transmit side faults character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = reserved.
Bit 4 = reserved.
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation (0 to 10) of the number of interface transmit side stored faults.
Rev. 4
Where: Character 'h': Interface transmit side faults character 2.
B–27
Remote Control Operation
B–28
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Transmit Data/AIS.
Bit 4 = Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock.
Bit 3 = Selected Transmit Clock Activity.
Bit 2 = Programming.
Bit 1 = Configuration.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Where: Character 'i': Interface receive side faults character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = reserved.
Bit 4 = reserved.
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation (0 to 10) of the number of interface receive side stored faults.
Where: Character 'j': Interface receive side faults character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Buffer Underflow.
Bit 4 = Buffer Overflow.
Bit 3 = Receive Data Loss/AIS.
Bit 2 = Frame BER.
Bit 1 = reserved.
Bit 0 = Selected Buffer Clock Activity.
Where: Character 'k': Interface receive side faults character 3.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Buffer Clock PLL Lock.
Bit 4 = Demux Lock.
Bit 3 = 2047 Pattern Lock Detect.
Bit 2 = Buffer Full.
Bit 1 = Programming.
Bit 0 = Configuration.
Where: Character 'l': Common equipment fault status character
1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Monitor and Control Module.
Bit 4 = Interface Module.
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation (0 to 10) of the number of common equipment stored faults.
Where: Character 'm': Common equipment fault status character
2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Battery/Clock.
Bit 4 = +5V Power Supply.
Bit 3 = -5V Power Supply.
Bit 2 = +12V Power Supply.
Bit 1 = -12V Power Supply.
Bit 0 = reserved.
Where: Character 'n': Interface backward alarm status character
1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = TX Backward Alarm 1.
Bit 4 = TX Backward Alarm 2.
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation (0 to 10) of the number of backward alarm stored faults.
Where: Character 'o': Interface backward alarm status character
2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = TX Backward Alarm 3.
Bit 4 = TX Backward Alarm 4.
Bit 3 = RX Backward Alarm 1.
Bit 2 = RX Backward Alarm 2.
Bit 1 = RX Backward Alarm 3.
Bit 0 = RX Backward Alarm 4.
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem Remote Control Operation
Change
Status
Equipment
Type
M&C
Firmware
Information
:
Command
Response:
<add/CS_'cr'
>add/CS_x'cr''lf']
:
Command
Response:
<add/ET_'cr'
>add/ET_tttttttt_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr''lf']
:
Command
Response:
<add/MCFI_'cr'
>add/MCFI_'cr'
VER_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr'
FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr' mm/dd/yy'cr''lf']
Where: Character 'p': Interface Reed-Solomon Unavailable
Seconds.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = not used.
Bit 4 = not used.
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation (0 to 10) of the number of Reed-Solomon Unavailable Seconds stored faults.
Where: 'x' character is defined as follows:
@ = No change since last BCS_ and BCSF_ polls.
A = BCS_ response has changed since last BCS_ poll.
B = BCSF_ response has changed since last BCSF_ poll.
C = Both responses have changed since last BCS_ and
BCSF_ polls.
This command indicates that a change has or has not occurred on either the BCS_ or the BCSF_ response since the last BCS_ or BCSF_ poll.
Where: tttttttt = Equipment type.
xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version.
Where: xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number (0.0.0 to
999.999.999).
nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
r = Firmware revision (-, or A to Z).
Where: xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number (0.0.0 to
999.999.999).
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
r = Firmware revision (-, or A to Z).
Modulator
Firmware
Information
Demodulato r Firmware
Information
:
Command
Response:
<add/DFI_'cr'
>add/DFI_'cr'
VER_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr'
FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr' mm/dd/yy'cr'
FPGA_FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr'
FPGA_mm/dd/yy'cr''lf']
Interface
Firmware
Information
:
Command
Response:
<add/MFI_'cr'
>add/MFI_'cr'
VER_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr'
FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr' mm/dd/yy'cr'
FPGA_FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr'
FPGA_mm/dd/yy'cr'
FILTER_FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr'
FILTER_mm/dd/yy'cr''lf']
Modulator
Options/
Misc.
Information
:
Command
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_'cr'
VER_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr'
FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr' mm/dd/yy'cr'
FPGA_FW/nnnnnn-ddr'cr'
FPGA_mm/dd/yy'cr''lf']
:
Command
Response:
<add/MOI_'cr'
>add/MOI_'cr' x,8PSK/16QAM'cr' x,HIGH_STABILITY'cr''lf']
Where: xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number (0.0.0 to
999.999.999).
nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
r = Firmware revision (-, or A to Z).
Where: xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number (0.0.0 to
999.999.999).
nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
r = Firmware revision (-, or A to Z).
Where: x = 0 (option not installed) or 1 (option installed).
Rev. 4 B–29
Remote Control Operation
Demodulato r Options/
Misc.
Information
:
Command
Response:
<add/DOI_'cr'
>add/DOI_'cr' x,8PSK/16QAM'cr''lf']
Interface
Options/
Misc.
Information
:
Command
Response:
<add/IOI_'cr'
>add/IOI_'cr' dddddd'cr' y,BUILD'cr' x,BUFFER'cr' x,ESC'cr' x,RS_EFD'cr' x,RS_DVB'cr' x,64K_ESC_'cr' z,TX_ESC_JUMPER'cr' z,RX_ESC_JUMPER'cr''lf']
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Where: x = 0 (option not installed) or 1 (option installed).
Where: dddddd = G.703, ECL, PECL, or MIL-188-144 (interface type).
y = 1, 2, or 3 (build type).
x = 0 (option not installed) or 1 (option installed).
z = 0 (N/A), 1 (AUDIO ESC jumpered), or 2 (64K DATA ESC jumpered).
B–30 Rev. 4
Rev. 4
G
Glossary
The following is a list of acronyms and abbreviations that may be found in this manual.
Acronym/
Abbreviation
Ω
16QAM
8PSK
A
A/D
AC
ADC
ADJ
ADMA
ADPCM
AFC
AGC
AIS
AM
AMI
AOC
APM
ASC
ASCII
ASK
ASYNC
AUPC
AUX 1
AVC
BB
BCD
BER
BER CONT bit/s
BPSK
BTU
Definition
Ohms
16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
8 Phase Shift Keying
Ampere
Analog to Digital
Alternating Current
Analog to Digital Converter
Adjust
Amplitude Domain Multiple Access
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
Automatic Frequency Control
Automatic Gain Control
Alarm Indication Signal
Amplitude Modulation
Alternate Mark Inversion
Automatic Offset Control
Amplitude Phase Modulation
Add-Select-Compare
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Amplitude Shift Keying
Asynchronous
Automatic Uplink Power Control
Auxiliary 1
Automatic Volume Control
Baseband
Binary Coded Decimal
Bit Error Rate
BIT Error Rate Continuous bits per second
Bi-Phase Shift Keying
British Thermal Unit g–1
Glossary g–2
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
CL
CLK
CLNA
CLR
CMOS
Coax
Codec
COM
CPFSK
CPSK
CPU cr
CRC
BW
BWR
C
CE
C/N
C/No
CCITT
CDMA
CH
CHNL
CIC
CRT
CS
CSC
CSMA
CTS
CU
CW
D&I
D/A
D/C
DAC
DAMA dB dB/Hz dBc dBm dBm0
DBS dBW
DC
DCE
DCPSK
DDO
DDS
Demod
DEMUX
DET
DOD
DM
DPCM
DPSK
DSP
DSR
Backward Alarm or Bandwidth
Bandwidth Ratio
Celsius
Customer Equipment
Carrier-to-Noise Ratio
Carrier-to-Noise Density Ratio
International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee
Code Division Multiple Access
Channel
Channel
Common Interface Circuit
Carrier Loss
Clock
C-band LNA
Clear
Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
Coaxial
Coder/Decoder
Common
Continuous-Phase Frequency Shift Keying
Coherent Phase Shift Keying
Central Processing Unit
Carriage Return
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Cathode Ray Tube
Clear to Send
Comstream Compatible
Carrier Sense Multiple Access
Clear to Send
Channel Unit
Continuous Wave
Drop and Insert
Digital-to-Analog
Down Converter
Digital-to-Analog Converter
Demand Assignment Multiple Access
Decibels
Decibels/Hertz (unit of carrier-to-noise density ratio)
Decibels referred to carrier
Decibels referred to 1.0 milliwatt
The signal magnitude in dBm referenced to the nominal level at that point
Direct Broadcast Satellite
Decibels referred to 1.0 watt
Direct Current
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
Differentially Coherent Phase Shift Keying
Drop Data Output
Direct Digital Synthesis
Demodulator
Demultiplexer
Detector
Department of Defense
Data Mode
Differential Pulse Code Modulation
Differential Phase Shift Keying
Digital Signal Processing
Data Signal Rate
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
FET
FFSK
FIFO
Flt
FM
FPGA
FS
FSK
FW
GHz
GND
HI STAB
HPA
Hz
I&Q
I/O
IBS
IC
IDI
IDR
IESS
IF
INMARSAT
INT
INTELSAT
ISD
ISO k
K Ω kbit/s kHz ks/s kW
LAN
LCD
LED lf
DTE
DVB
E&M
EBU
E b
/N
0
ECL
EDP
EEPROM
EFD
EIA
EMC
EMF
EPROM
ESC
ESD
EXC
EXT
FDC
FDMA
FEC
Data Terminal Equipment
Digital Video Broadcast
Ear and Mouth
European Broadcasting Union
Bit Energy-to-Noise Ratio
Emitter Coupled Logic
Electronic Data Processing
Electrically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EFData Compatible
Electronic Industries Association
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
Electromotive Force
Erasable Read-Only Memory
Engineering Service Circuit or Engineering Service Channel
Electrostatic Discharge
External Clock
External Reference Clock
Fairchild Data Compatible
Frequency Division Multiple Access
Forward Error Correction
Field Effect Transistor
Fast Frequency Shift Keying
First in/First Out
Fault
Frequency Modulation
Field Programmable Gate Array
Frame Sync
Frequency Shift Keying
Firmware
Gigahertz (10 9 hertz)
Ground
High Stability
High Power Amplifier
Hertz (cycle per second)
In-Phase and Quadrature
Input/Output
INTELSAT Business Services
Integrated Circuit
Insert Data Input
Intermediate Data Rate
INTELSAT Earth Station Standards
Intermediate Frequency
International Maritime Satellite Organization
Internal
International Telecommunications Satellite Organization
Insert Send Data
International Standards Organization kilo (10 3 ) kilo-ohms
Kilobits per second (10 3 bits per second)
Kilohertz (10 3 Hertz)
Kilosymbols Per Second (10 3 symbols per second)
Kilowatt (10 3 Watts)
Local Area Network
Liquid Crystal Display
Light-Emitting Diode
Line Feed
Glossary
Rev. 4 g–3
Glossary g–4
MSB
MUX n
N/A
NACK
NC
NO
NRZ ns
OQPSK
OSC p
P-P
P/AR
PAL
PC
MFS
MHz
Min
Mod
MOP
MPC ms
Ms/s
LNA
LO
LSB
LSI m
M&C mA
Max
Mbit/s
MC
PSK
PWB
PWR
QAM
QPSK
RAM
RD
REF
RF
RLSD
RMA
ROM
RR
RS
PCB
PCM
PECL pF
PK
PLL
PN
PPM
PS
Low Noise Amplifier
Local Oscillator
Least Significant Bit
Large Scale Integration (semiconductors) mille (10 -3 )
Monitor and Control
Milliamperes
Maximum
Megabits per second
Monitor and Control
Multiframe Sync
Megahertz (10 6 Hertz)
Minimum or Minute
Modulator
Modulated Output Power
Microprocessor Controller
Millisecond (10 -3 second)
Megasymbols per second
Most Significant Bit
Multiplexer nano (10 -9 )
Not Applicable
Negative Acknowledgment
No Connection or Normally Closed
Normally Open
Non-Return to Zero (code)
Nanosecond (10 -9 second)
Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Oscillator pico (10 -12 )
Peak-to-Peak
Peak to Average Ratio
Programmable Array Logic
Printed Circuit
Printed Circuit Board
Pulse Code Modulation
Positive Emitter Coupled Logic
PicoFarads (10 -12 Farads)
Peak
Phase-Locked Loop
Pseudo-Noise
Parts Per Million
Power Supply
Phase Shift Keying
Printed Wiring Board
Power
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Random Access Memory
Receive Data
Reference
Radio Frequency
Receive Line Signal Detect
Return Material Authorization
Read-Only Memory
Receiver Ready
Ready to Send
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
Rev. 4
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem
TDMA
TEMP
TERR
TP
TT
TTL
TX
TXCLK
TXD
TXO
U/C
UART
UHF
UNK
US
UW
V
VAC
VCO
VCXO
VDC
VSWR
W
WG
SCT
SCTE
SD
SFS
SMS
SN
SSB
SSPA
ST
SW
SYNC
TB
TCXO
RT
RTS
RU
RX
RXCLK
RXD
RZ s
S/N
SCPC
SCR
Receive Timing
Request to Send
Rack Unit
Receive (Receiver)
Receive Clock
Receive Data
Return-to-Zero
Second
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Single Channel Per Carrier
Serial Clock Receive
Serial Clock Transmit
Serial Clock Transmit External
Send Data
Subframe Sync
Satellite Multiservice System
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Single-sideband
Solid State Power Amplifier
Send Timing
Switch
Synchronize
Terminal Block
Temperature-Compensated Crystal Oscillator
Time Division Multiple Access
Temperature
Terrestrial
Test Point
Terminal Timing
Transistor-Transistor Logic
Transmit (Transmitter)
Transmit Clock
Transmit Data
TX Octet
Up converter
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
Ultra-high Frequency
Unknown
United States
Unique Word
Volts
Volts, Alternating Current
Voltage-Controlled Oscillator
Voltage-Controlled Crystal Oscillator
Volts, Direct Current
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Watt
Waveguide
Glossary
Rev. 4 g–5
Glossary
This page is intentionally left blank.
SDM-9000 Satellite Modem g–6 Rev. 4
Unit
1 centimeter
Centimeter
—
1 inch
1 foot
1 yard
1 meter
2.540
30.480
91.44
100.0
1.609 x 10 5
Inch
0.3937
—
12.0
36.0
39.37
10 4
METRIC CONVERSIONS
Foot
0.03281
Yard
Units of Length
Mile
0.01094 6.214 x 10 -6
Meter Kilometer Millimeter
0.01 — —
0.08333
—
0.2778
0.3333
1.578 x 10 -5
1.893 x 10 -4
0.254 — 25.4
0.3048 — —
3.0 —
3.281 1.094 x 3 1.760 x 10 3
5.679 x 10 -4
6.214 x 10 -4
—
0.9144 — —
— — —
1.609 x 10 3 1.609 — 1 mile
1 mm
1 kilometer
—
—
0.03937
—
—
—
—
—
—
0.621
—
—
—
—
—
—
Unit
32
°
Fahrenheit
212
°
Fahrenheit
-459.6
°
Fahrenheit
°°°°
Fahrenheit
—
—
—
Temperature Conversions
°°°°
Centigrade
0
(water freezes)
100
(water boils)
273.1
(absolute 0)
Formulas
C = (F - 32) * 0.555
F = (C * 1.8) + 32
Unit
1 gram
Gram
—
Ounce
Avoirdupois
0.03527
Units of Weight
Ounce
Troy
Pound
Avoir.
0.03215 0.002205
Pound
Troy Kilogram
1 31.10 1.097
0.002679 0.001
1 — 0.9115 0.0625 0.07595 0.02835
— 0.06857 0.08333 0.03110
1 lb. Troy
1 kilogram
373.2
1.0 x 10 3
13.17 12.0 0.8229 — 0.3732
35.27 32.15 2.205 2.679 —
2114
WEST
7
TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA
85281
USA
480 • 333 • 2200
PHONE
480 • 333 • 2161
FAX
Herunterladen
Öffentlicher Link aktualisiert
Der öffentliche Link zu Ihrem Chat wurde aktualisiert. Sie können Ihre Chat-Links nach der Registrierung hier einsehen und verwalten.
Öffentlicher Dokumentenlink
Werbung
